Mini Cooper SE Mini Electric 2020 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 286
1 of 286

Summary of Content for Mini Cooper SE Mini Electric 2020 Owner's Manual PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COOPER SE.

LINK: CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COOPER SE.

Thank you for choosing a MINI. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

3 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

NOTES Information.............................................................................................................................. 6

QUICK REFERENCE Entering.................................................................................................................................. 16

Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................19

On the road............................................................................................................................ 23

AT A GLANCE Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 32

Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................36

Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 44

General settings................................................................................................................... 48

Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................60

MINI eDRIVE........................................................................................................................62

Safety of the high-voltage system.................................................................................. 65

CONTROLS Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 66

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel.................................................................................85

Transporting children safely............................................................................................ 95

Driving..................................................................................................................................100

Displays................................................................................................................................ 118

Lights.................................................................................................................................... 135

Safety.....................................................................................................................................141

Driving stability control systems.................................................................................162

Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 167

4 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Climate control...................................................................................................................180

Interior equipment............................................................................................................187

Storage compartments.....................................................................................................198

Cargo area............................................................................................................................201

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 208

Increasing range................................................................................................................212

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle........................................................................................................ 218

Wheels and tires................................................................................................................227

Engine compartment........................................................................................................243

Coolant..................................................................................................................................246

Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 248

Replacing components.................................................................................................... 250

Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 256

Care........................................................................................................................................262

REFERENCE Technical data.................................................................................................................... 268

Appendix..............................................................................................................................270

Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................272

2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID5 II/20, 03 20 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

5 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Information

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is pro- vided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap- pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- tainment, and Communication can be ob- tained as a printed book from the service center.

The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Additional sources of informa- tion

Service center A service center will be glad to answer questions at any time.

Internet Vehicle information and general informa- tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa- ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad- ditional information, refer to page 60.

MINI Motorers Guide app The app specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets.

MINI Motorers Guide Web Drivers Guide Web shows the most suita- ble information for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually installed in the vehicle will be explained. Drivers Guide Web can be dis- played in any current browser.

Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Symbol Meaning

Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Seite 6

NOTES Information

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Symbol Meaning

"..." Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

... Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system..

... Responses generated by the voice activation system.

Action steps Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. The steps must be car- ried out in the defined order.

1. First action step.

2. Second action step.

Enumerations Enumerations without mandatory order or alternative possibilities are presented as a list with bullet points.

First possibility.

Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components This symbol on a vehicle component

indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.

The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that incorrect use of high-voltage equip- ment or of orange-colored high-voltage

components results in the risk of life-threat- ening injury from electric shock.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and op- tional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates fea- tures and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the se- lected optional features or the country-spe- cific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

For any options and equipment not descri- bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealers service center is happy to an- swer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con- ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea- tures described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Seite 7

Information NOTES

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap- pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

Manufacturer The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri- sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.

Intended use Heed the following when using the vehicle:

Owner's Manual.

Information on the vehicle. Do not re- move stickers.

Technical vehicle data.

The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven.

Vehicle documents and statutory docu- ments.

Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ- ent country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operat- ing conditions and registration require- ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge war- ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further

information on warranty is available from a service center.

Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that you entrust corresponding pro- cedures to a MINI dealers service center. If you choose to use another service facility, the manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair, according to MINI specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for in- stance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damage and related safety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of components, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a safety risk.

Parts and accessories The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends the use of parts and accessory prod- ucts approved by the manufacturer of the MINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants genuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product

Seite 8

NOTES Information

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific of- ficial approval was issued. The manufac- turer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning For vehicles sold in California, the law re- quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning:

Warning

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au- tomobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnish- ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi- cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and repro- ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi- cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other re- productive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of Cali- fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in labo- ratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and wa- ter. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- hicle.

Warning

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals in- cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex- haust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well- ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- hicle.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publica- tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

Federal Emissions System Defect War- ranty.

Federal Emissions Performance War- ranty.

California Emission Control System Lim- ited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models or in the War- ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana- dian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operat- ing conditions and homologation require- ments in your country and continental re- gion in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating con- ditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please con-

Seite 9

Information NOTES

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

tact Customer Relations for further informa- tion.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for maintenance measures:

MINI Maintenance system.

Service and Warranty Information Book- let for US models.

Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained or is im- properly maintained, this could result in se- rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim- ited Warranty.

Refer to chapter engine oil change regard- ing recommended service intervals for oil changes.

Data memory

General information Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self- generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance dur- ing driving, for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control units facili- tate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam- ple.

Personal reference Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi- cle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehicle identification number, li- cense plate and corresponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, for instance via utilized services.

Operating data in the vehicle Control units process data to operate the ve- hicle.

For example, this includes:

Status messages for the vehicle and its individual components, e.g., wheel rota- tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.

Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating pe- riod.

Electronic components, e.g. control units and ignition keys, contain components for storing technical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component us- age, maintenance requirements events or faults can be stored temporarily or perma- nently.

This information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system, or the environment, for instance:

Operating states of system components, for instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery status.

Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes.

Seite 10

NOTES Information

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Responses by the vehicle to special sit- uations such as airbag deployment or engagement of the driving stability con- trol systems.

Information on vehicle-damaging events.

The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is volatile and is only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small share of the data is stored event-related in event or fault memories.

When servicing, for instance during repairs, service processes, warranty cases, and qual- ity assurance measures, this technical infor- mation can be read out from the vehicle to- gether with the vehicle identification number.

A dealers service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop can read out the information. The socket for OBD On- board Diagnosis required by law in the ve- hicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical con- ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi- fication of the fault, compliance with war- ranty obligations and quality improvement.

Furthermore, the manufacturer has product monitoring duties to meet in line with prod- uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle manufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle can also be used to check customer claims for warranty and guaranty.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, com- fort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified or reset at any time.

For example, this includes:

Settings for the seat and steering wheel positions.

Suspension and climate control settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to the entertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.

This includes the following depending on the respective equipment:

Multimedia data such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system.

Address book data for use in conjunc- tion with an integrated hands-free sys- tem or an integrated navigation system.

Entered navigation destinations.

Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been con- nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time.

This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the selected settings for the use of the services.

Incorporation of mobile devices Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo- bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in- stance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements.

Seite 11

Information NOTES

11 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The sound and picture from the mobile de- vice can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain in- formation is transferred to the mobile de- vice at the same time. Depending on the type of incorporation, this includes, for in- stance position data and other general vehi- cle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation or music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between the mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac- tive access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information If the vehicle has a wireless network con- nection, this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle manufacturer Where online services from the vehicle manufacturer are concerned, the corre- sponding functions are described in the ap- propriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele- vant legal information pertaining to data protection is provided there too. Personal data may be used to perform online serv- ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con-

nection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of per- sonal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrange- ment or consent. It is also possible to acti- vate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. That is, with the exception of func- tions and services required by law such as Assist systems.

Services from other providers When using online services from other pro- viders, these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this proc- ess. Information on the way in which per- sonal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be obtained from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash- like situations, such as an air bag deploy- ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- cord such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating.

Seite 12

NOTES Information

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Whether or not the driver and passen- ger safety belts were fastened.

How far, if at all, the driver was depress- ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driv- ing conditions and no personal data, for in- stance name, gender, age, and crash loca- tion, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce- ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the ve- hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the spe- cial equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

Engine compartment

The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Windshield

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in- jury or death, you should immediately in- form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti- fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of ve- hicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

Seite 13

Information NOTES

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about mo- tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

Seite 14

NOTES Information

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Seite 15

Information NOTES

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Entering

Opening and closing

Buttons on the vehicle key

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, either only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to un- lock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central locking system

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehi- cle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the ve- hicle.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Comfort Access

Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operat- ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

Seite 16

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- cle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Tailgate

unlocking

Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the outside of the tailgate.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked.

Closing Closing the tailgate manually.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig- nal

3 Instrument cluster

4 Wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready state is established.

Seite 17

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Driver's door

1 Power windows

2 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Selector lever

2 Controller with buttons

3 Parking brake

Central Information Display (CID)

Concept The Central Information Display (CID) com- bines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens destination input menu for navigation.

Opens navigation map.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Voice activation

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol indicates that the voice ac- tivation system is active.

If no other commands are available, operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Seite 18

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

To raise: push the head restraint up.

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- itor

3 Folding in and out

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer- red height and angle to suit your seating position.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 19

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Entering the rear 1. Pull lever up to the stop.

2. Fold backrest forward.

3. Push the seat forward.

Original position 1. Push the seat back into the original po-

sition.

2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

Infotainment

Radio

Control elements

1 Changing the waveband

2 Changing the entertainment source

3 Sound output on/off, volume

4 Changing the station/track

5 Programmable memory buttons

Navigation destination entry

Entering a destination via address

State/province

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. "State/Province?"

4. Select the country from the list.

Entering the address

The address can be entered in any order.

Example: entering the address via the town/ city

1. "City/Postal code?"

2. Enter the town/city.

The list is narrowed down further with each entry.

3. Select the symbol.

4. Select a town/city from the list.

5. If necessary, enter the street.

6. Select the street as you would the town/ city.

7. If necessary, enter a house number.

8. Select the symbol.

9. Select a house number or range of house numbers from the list.

Starting destination guidance "Start guidance"

If only the town/city was entered: destina- tion guidance is started to the town/city center.

Pairing the mobile phone After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper- ated using the Central Information Display

Seite 20

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo- ken instructions.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- played on the Control Display.

5. Select the functions for which the mo- bile phone is to be used.

6. To perform additional steps on the mo- bile phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's manual: e.g., search for or con- nect the Bluetooth device or a new de- vice.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- pears on the mobile phone display. Se- lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- trol number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

Compare the control number dis- played on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will ap- pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the phone

Accepting a call Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen- tral Information Display (CID) or the button on the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster

Use the OK button on the steering wheel to select: "Accept"

Dialing a number 1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the numbers individually.

4. Select the symbol.

Establish the connection via the additional phone:

1. Press the button.

2. "Call via"

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a com- patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements Compatible iPhone.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

Corresponding mobile contract.

Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera- tion are activated on the iPhone.

Seite 21

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

"Bluetooth"

"Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

Seite 22

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

On the road

Driving

Drive-ready state

General information When drive-ready state is switched on, the vehicle is operational.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

Activated drive-ready state is the equiva- lent of a running engine in conventional ve- hicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is equivalent to switching the engine off.

To save battery power when parking, switch off drive-ready state and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Drive-ready state is switched off automati- cally:

When you lock the vehicle while low beams are switched on.

If the charge state of the batteries is low.

When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is un- buckled and the low beams are switched off.

While the driver's safety belt is unbuck- led with driver's door open and low beams off.

After the driver's door is opened or closed or the driver's safety belt is released, the radio-ready state remains active.

Start/Stop button Pressing the Start/Stop button switches standby state on or off.

Drive-ready state is switched on when you depress the

brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.

Switching on drive-ready state 1. Close the driver's door.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Drive-ready state is switched on.

Displays READY indicates drive-ready state.

Drive-ready state in detail

Requirements Driving is possible under the following con- ditions:

The high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged.

The driver's door is closed.

Charging cable is detached.

Driving away 1. Switch on drive-ready state.

2. Apply the brake and engage the selector lever in position D or R.

Seite 23

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive off.

Accelerator pedal positions

1 Deceleration

2 Coasting

3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePO- WER

Engaging the gear Interlock: the selector lever position P

can be exited only with drive-ready state engaged.

Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift com- mand will not be executed.

Shift lock: before shifting out of P, re- move the charging cable from the vehi- cle; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed.

Engaging N, D, R

Move the selector lever in the desired direc- tion.

Engaging P

Apply brake and press button P.

Parking brake

Setting Pull the switch when the vehicle is stationary.

The LED and indicator light light up.

Releasing Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P

is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Seite 24

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal, roadside parking light

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

High beams off/headlight flasher, ar- row 2.

Turn signal

On: press the lever past the resistance point.

Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist- ance point.

Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down.

Brief signaling: press the lever to the re- sistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Canada: roadside parking light

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

On: with the standby state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 sec- onds.

Off: briefly press the lever to the resist- ance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Seite 25

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

Resting position of the wipers: posi- tion 0.

Rain sensor: position 1.

Normal wiper speed: position 2.

Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.

Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Seite 26

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist- ance point.

Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

To switch off normal wipe: press down once.

Brief wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Seite 27

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Climate control

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Recirculated-air mode.

Controls the air flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs the windows.

Rear window defroster.

Charging the vehicle

Charging the vehicle

Charging socket flap

The charging socket flap is located on the right side of the vehicle.

Always keep charging socket clean and un- obstructed.

Keep the charging socket flap closed when the charging socket is not used.

Connecting the charging cable To connect, engage selector lever posi- tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-

Seite 28

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed.

1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow. The charging socket flap opens.

2. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.

3. Remove the cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.

5. Insert the appropriate charging cable plug, and push it in until it engages.

When charging at a charging station, follow the instructions at the charging station.

Removing When the charging process is active and the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is automatically locked. Unlock the vehicle be- fore removing the cable.

When the charging process is completed, the charging cable is automatically un- locked.

If necessary, clean the area between the charging socket flap and charging socket, for instance from snow, before removing it.

1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key if it is locked.

Charging cable is unlocked.

2. Press the release button on the handle, arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at the gripping areas.

Charging process is interrupted.

3. Remove the charging cable from the charging socket, arrow 2.

4. Put the charging socket lid back on.

5. Press on the charging socket flap until it engages.

6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the household socket or Level 2 charg- ing cable from the port on the charging station as applicable.

8. Stow the charging cable.

At a charging station, insert the perma- nently installed charging cable in the place provided for it.

Seite 29

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

29 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed:

At least twice a month.

Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis- play.

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance This service can be reached around the clock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis- tance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Seite 30

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Seite 31

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 81

2 Exterior mirror operation 92

3 Buttons of the central locking sys- tem 71

4 Lights

Front fog lights 138

Light switch 135

Lights off

Daytime running lights 137

Parking lights 135

Low beams 135

Seite 32

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Automatic headlight con- trol 136

Cornering light 137

High-beam Assistant 137 Instrument lighting 139

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Cruise control on/off 167

Cruise control: to store the speed

Pausing, continuing cruise control

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

6 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 109

High beams, head- light flasher 109

High-beam Assistant 137

Roadside parking lights 136

Onboard Computer 129

7 Instrument cluster 118

8 Steering column stalk, right

Wipers 109

Wiper on Canadian mod- els 113 Rain sensor 110

Rain sensor on Canadian mod- els 114 Cleaning windows 111

Rear window wiper in Cana- dian models 112

Rear window wiper 112

Clean the rear window 112

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Voice activation 44

Telephone

Confirm the selection 128

Move selection up 128

Move selection down 128

Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

11 Adjusting the steering wheel 94

Seite 33

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

12 Unlocking the hood 244

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 256

Intelligent Safety 152

2 Control Display 36

3 Radio/Multimedia

4 Glove compartment 198

5 Climate control 180

6 PDC Park Distance Con- trol 169

Rearview camera 172

Parking assistant 175 Energy recovery 104

Switch drive-ready state on and off 100

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 162

MINI Driving Modes switch 164

7 Transmission selector lever 102

8 Controller with buttons 38

9 Parking brake 107

Seite 34

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request, SOS 257

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas- senger airbag 144

3 Reading lights 139

4 Ambient light 139

5 Panoramic glass sunroof 82

6 Interior lights 139

Seite 35

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) com- bines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be- tween entering upper and lower case let- ters, numbers and characters:

Symbol Function

Change between capital and lower-case letters.

Insert blank space.

Use voice activation.

Confirm entry.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparison When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automati- cally.

Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle.

Only those letters are offered during en- try for which data is available.

Destination search: place names can be entered in all languages that are availa- ble on the Control Display.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Se- lecting the menu item activates or deacti- vates the function.

Seite 36

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Status information

General information The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status informa- tion is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being re- ceived.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular net- work.

Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Other symbols

Symbol Meaning

Check Control message.

The sound output has been switched off.

Encrypted connection not ac- tive.

Request for the current vehicle position.

Checking the current vehicle po- sition.

Split screen

General information

Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, for in- stance information from the Onboard Com- puter.

In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visi- ble even when switching to another menu.

Switching the split screen on/off

1. Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

Seite 37

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus which support the split screen function.

1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller.

3. Select the desired setting.

Specifying the number of displays

It is possible to specify the number of dis- plays.

1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller.

3. "Personalize menu"

4. Select the desired setting.

5. Move the Controller to the left.

Control elements

Overview

1 Control Display with touchscreen

2 Controller with buttons

Control Display

General information To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions, refer to page 266.

In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to in- tense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for in- stance through shade or air conditioning, the normal functions are restored.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Con- trol Display can shift and damage the Con- trol Display. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automatically The Control Display is switched on automat- ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the Control Display is needed for operation.

In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Switching on/off manually The Control Display can also be switched off manually.

1. Press the button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.

Controller with navigation system

General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to se- lect menu items and enter the settings.

Seite 38

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Operation Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

Press to select a menu item, for example.

Tilt in four directions to switch between displays, for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens destination input menu for navigation.

Opens navigation map.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to se- lect menu items and enter the settings.

Operation Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

Seite 39

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Press to select a menu item, for example.

Tilt in two directions to switch between displays, for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func- tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the Controller.

Adjusting menu contents The display of menus "Media/Radio", "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can be adjusted, for instance to remove the en- tries of functions that are not used from the menu.

Seite 40

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Via Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the menu.

2. "Personalize menu"

3. Select desired menu contents to be dis- played.

Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, for instance "System settings", a new display appears.

Move the Controller to the left.

The current display closes and the previ- ous display is shown.

Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.

Move the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Opening recently used menus The recently used menus can be displayed.

Press the button twice.

Opening the Options menu Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas, for in- stance:

"Split screen": screen settings.

"Media/Radio": control options for the selected main menu.

"Save station": if applicable, further con- trol options for the selected menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Input 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or

numbers.

2. : confirm entry.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Press the Controller: delete letters or number.

or

Hold the Controller down: de- lete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en- tries, the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left edge.

2. Select the first letter of the desired en- try.

The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Operation via touchscreen

General information The Control Display is equipped with a touchscreen.

Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not use any objects.

Opening the main menu Tap on the symbol.

Seite 41

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func- tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Tap the desired menu item.

Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, a new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Swipe to the left.

Tap arrow.

The new display opens.

Opening recently used menus 1. Tap on the symbol.

2. Tap on the symbol.

Entering letters and numbers

Input 1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.

A keyboard is displayed on the Control Display.

2. Enter desired letters and numbers.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Tapping the symbol: deletes the letter or number.

Tapping and holding the symbol all letters: deletes all letters or numbers.

Operating navigation map The navigation map can be moved using the touchscreen.

Function Operation

Enlarge/shrink map.

Drag in or out with the fingers.

Programmable memory but- tons

General information The Central Information Display (CID) func- tions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for instance radio stations, navigation destina- tions, phone numbers and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Seite 42

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Storing a function 1. Select the function via the Central Infor-

mation Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired but- ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing a function Press the button.

The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display.

Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously

for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

Seite 43

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice commands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements during input.

General information

Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary can only be op- erated via the voice activation system to a limited extent.

The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.

... in the Owner's Manual denotes ver- bal instructions to use with the voice ac- tivation system.

Functional requirements

A language must be set via the Control Display that is supported by the voice

activation system. To set the language, refer to page 48.

Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

Using the voice activation sys- tem

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol indicates that the voice ac- tivation system is active.

No other commands may be available. In this case, operate the function via the Cen- tral Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands

General information Most menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands.

Commands from other menus can also be spoken.

You can also select list entries such as phone list entries via voice activation. Read

Seite 44

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

these list entries out loud exactly as they are shown in the respective list.

Displaying possible commands The following is displayed in the top area of the Control Display:

Some possible commands for the current menu.

Some possible commands from other menus.

Status of the voice recognition.

Encrypted connection is not availa- ble.

Help on the voice activation system General information on voice control:

have information on the operating prin- ciple of the voice activation system read out loud.

Help: have help for the current menu read out loud.

Example: opening the tone set- tings

The commands of the menu items are spo- ken just as they are selected via the Con- troller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out- put, if needed.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Media and radio

4. Tone

Adjusting

Setting the language The language to be used for voice activation and system announcements can be set.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"

5. Select the desired language.

Setting the voice dialog You can set the system to use standard dia- log or a short version.

The short version of the voice dialog plays back short messages in abbreviated form.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Language"

4. "Speech mode:"

5. Select the desired setting.

Speaking during voice output It is possible to answer during inquiries of the voice activation system. The function can be deactivated if inquiries are often un- desirably interrupted, for instance due to background noise or conversations in the vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Language"

4. "Speaking during voice output"

Seite 45

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Activating voice recognition via the server The voice recognition feature via the server provides a dictation function and a natural method of entering destinations while im- proving the quality of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted connec- tion and stored locally there.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Language"

4. "Server speech recognition"

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button during the spoken instructions until the desired volume is set.

The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

The volume is stored for the profile cur- rently used.

Information on Emergency Requests

Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the es- tablishment of a phone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 257, close to the interior mirror.

System limits

Certain noises can be detected and may lead to problems. Keep the doors, win- dows, and glass sunroof closed.

Noises from the front passenger or the rear seat bench can impair the system. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Major language dialects can cause prob- lems with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud and clear.

Using the voice activation sys- tem of the smartphone

A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be used via voice activation.

Activate voice command response on the smartphone for this purpose.

1. Press and hold the button on the steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.

Voice command response is activated on the smartphone.

2. Release the button.

If activation is successful, a confirma- tion appears on the Control Display.

If it was not possible to activate voice com- mand response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears on the Control Display.

Amazon Alexa Car Integration

Concept Alexa is a digital voice-controlled assistant by Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Inte- gration, Alexa can be used in the vehicle.

Seite 46

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

General information Some of the Alexa functions are limited in the vehicle to prevent any impairment of safety while driving.

Functional requirements Connected Voice Services purchased via

MINI Connected Store.

Same MINI Connected account used in the vehicle and in the MINI Connected app.

Vehicle added in the MINI Connected app.

Amazon account and MINI account con- nected in the MINI Connected app.

Smartphone connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth or USB.

Activation in the MINI Connected app The Amazon Alexa Car Integration is acti- vated in the MINI Connected app.

Follow the instructions in the app.

Activation in the vehicle An authorization for the use of Amazon Alexa Car Integration is required every time before starting a trip.

1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integra- tion:

Connect the smartphone to the vehi- cle via Bluetooth.

Selects appropriate driver profile, re- fer to page 75.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Wait for the signal.

4. Say activation word Alexa and desired command.

Information about the active function is displayed on the Control Display.

Malfunction In case of a malfunction, switch off the drive-ready state and restart again.

Seite 47

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

General settings

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Language

Setting the language Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the voice dialog For voice dialog for the voice activation sys- tem, refer to page 45.

Time

Setting the time zone Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time zone:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi- nutes are displayed.

8. Press the Controller.

Setting the time format Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time format:"

5. Select the desired setting.

Seite 48

AT A GLANCE General settings

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Date

Setting the date Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Date:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

7. Make the settings for the month and year.

Setting the date format Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Date format:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the units of measure- ment

You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, consumption, dis- tances and temperature.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Units"

4. Select the desired menu item.

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Activating/deactivating the display of the current vehicle position

Concept If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current vehicle position can be displayed in the MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Vehicle tracking"

4. "Vehicle tracking"

5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating popup windows

For some functions, popup windows are dis- played automatically on the Control Display. Some of these popup windows can be acti- vated or deactivated.

Seite 49

General settings AT A GLANCE

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Pop-ups"

4. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Control Display

Brightness Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Depending on the light conditions, the brightness settings may not be clearly visi- ble.

Screensaver If no entries are made via the Central Infor- mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be displayed after an adjustable time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Screensaver"

6. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Messages

Concept The menu centrally displays all messages ar- riving in the vehicle in list form.

General information The following messages can be displayed:

Traffic messages.

Communication messages, for example e-mails, SMS text messages or remind- ers.

Check Control messages.

Messages on service notifications.

Messages from the vehicle manufac- turer.

Messages are additionally displayed in the status field.

Retrieving messages Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

The menu in which the message is dis- played will open.

Deleting messages All messages, except Check Control mes- sages or messages from the vehicle manu- facturer, can be deleted from the list.

Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as they are relevant.

Seite 50

AT A GLANCE General settings

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

3. Press the button.

4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications"

Adjusting The following settings can be adjusted:

Select the applications, from which mes- sages will be permitted.

Sort the messages according to date or priority.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Notifications"

4. Select the desired setting.

Data protection

Data transfer

Concept The vehicle offers various functions which require data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions.

General information With data transfer deactivated, the respec- tive function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivating Follow the instructions on the Control Dis- play.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Concept Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently de- leted via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data is deleted:

Driver profile settings.

Stored radio stations.

Stored programmable memory buttons.

Travel and Onboard Computer informa- tion.

Music hard disk.

Navigation, for instance stored destina- tions.

Phone book.

Office data, for instance voice notes.

Login accounts.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes.

Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data Note and follow the instructions on the Con- trol Display.

Seite 51

General settings AT A GLANCE

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. "Delete personal data"

5. "Delete personal data"

6. "OK"

7. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes to complete.

If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele- tion.

Canceling deletion Switch on the drive-ready state to cancel deletion of the data.

Connections

Concept Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function.

General information The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile device.

Function Connec- tion type

Making calls via the hands- free system.

Using phone functions via the Central Information Dis- play (CID).

Using the smartphone Of- fice functions.

Bluetooth.

Playing music from the smartphone or the audio player.

Bluetooth or USB.

Using compatible apps via the Central Information Dis- play (CID).

Bluetooth or USB.

USB storage device:

Exporting and importing driver profiles.

Update the software.

Playing music.

USB.

Playing videos from the smartphone or the USB de- vice.

USB.

Using Apple CarPlay apps via the Central Information Display (CID) and voice op- eration.

Bluetooth and WLAN.

The following connection types require one- time pairing with the vehicle:

Bluetooth.

Apple CarPlay

Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.

Seite 52

AT A GLANCE General settings

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General information Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. These numbers can be displayed in the ve- hicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth info"

6. "System information"

A software update, refer to page 58, can be performed.

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements Compatible device, refer to page 53,

with Bluetooth interface.

The vehicle key is in the vehicle.

The device is ready for operation.

Bluetooth is activated on the device and in the vehicle, refer to page 53.

Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may be required on the device; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Switching on Bluetooth Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth"

Activating/deactivating telephone functions To use all supported functions of a mobile phone, the following functions must be acti- vated prior to pairing.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the desired setting:

"Office"

Activate function to transmit short messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes, and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can be incurred by transmit- ting all data to the vehicle.

"Contact images"

Activate function to show the con- tact pictures.

6. Move the Controller to the left.

Seite 53

General settings AT A GLANCE

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the de- vice will be used:

"Telephone"

"Bluetooth audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- played on the Control Display.

6. On the mobile device, search for Blue- tooth devices in the vicinity.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- pears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi- cle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- trol number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

Compare the control number dis- played on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Fre- quently Asked Questions, refer to page 54.

Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can help:

Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected?

There are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehi- cle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec- tions with other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone and start a new device search.

The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life.

Charge the mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer re- act?

The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and on again.

Possibly too high or too low ambient temperatures for mobile phone opera- tion.

Do not subject the mobile phone to ex- treme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used via the Central Information Display (CID)?

The mobile phone may not be properly configured, for instance as Bluetooth au- dio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the tele- phone or additional phone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entries displayed or why are they incomplete?

Seite 54

AT A GLANCE General settings

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete.

It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

It may not be possible to transmit con- tacts from social networks.

The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

Data volume of the contact too large, for instance due to stored information such as notes.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

A mobile phone is only connected as an audio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and con- nect it with the telephone or additional phone function.

How can the phone connection quality be improved?

The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted, de- pending on the mobile phone.

Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the area of the cen- ter console.

Insert the mobile phone into the wire- less charging tray.

Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not availa- ble, contact the hotline, a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

USB connection

General information The following mobile devices can be con- nected to the USB port:

Mobile phones.

The snap-in adapter features a separate USB port that is automatically connected when a compatible mobile phone is in- serted.

Audio devices with USB port, for in- stance MP3 players.

USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.

A connected USB storage device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge current of the USB port.

The following uses are possible on USB ports with data transfer:

Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer to page 75.

Playing music files via USB audio.

Playing videos via USB video.

Loading of software updates, refer to page 58.

Follow the following when connecting:

Do not use force when plugging the con- nector into the USB port.

Use a flexible adapter cable.

Protect the USB storage device against mechanical damage.

Due to the large number of USB storage devices available on the market, it can- not be guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle.

Do not expose USB storage devices to extreme environmental conditions, such

Seite 55

General settings AT A GLANCE

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the me- dia stored on the USB storage device cannot be guaranteed in all cases.

To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket, when it is connected to the USB port.

Depending on how the USB storage de- vice is being used, settings may be re- quired on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media:

USB hard drives.

USB hubs.

USB memory card readers with multiple slots.

HFS-formatted USB storage devices.

Devices such as fans or lamps.

Functional requirement Compatible device, refer to page 53, with USB port.

Connecting the device Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB port, refer to page 194.

The USB device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a com- patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

Corresponding mobile contract.

Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera- tion are activated on the iPhone.

Booking the MINI Connected service: Apple CarPlay preparation.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

"Bluetooth"

"Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to page 54, via Bluetooth

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list, refer to page 57.

Operation For more information, refer to the Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- munication.

Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

Seite 56

AT A GLANCE General settings

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

In this case, the following explanations can help:

The iPhone has already been paired with Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is established, CarPlay can no longer be se- lected.

Delete the iPhone concerned from the device list.

On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con- cerned from the list of stored vehicles under Bluetooth and under WLAN.

Pair the iPhone as a new device.

If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Managing mobile devices

General information After one-time pairing, the devices are

automatically recognized and recon- nected when standby state is switched on.

The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle after recognition.

For some devices, certain settings may be necessary, for instance authorization, see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device list All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

A symbol indicates, for which function a de- vice is used.

Symbol Function

"Telephone"

"Additional telephone"

"Bluetooth audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

Configuring the device Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select the desired device.

5. Select the desired setting.

If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appro- priate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the device The device's connection to the vehicle is disconnected.

The device remains paired and can be con- nected again, refer to page 57.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the device A disconnected device can be reconnected.

Seite 57

General settings AT A GLANCE

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the de- vice before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The func- tions may be deactivated on a device al- ready connected.

Deleting the device Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removed from the device list.

Swapping the telephone and additional phone If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle, the functions of the phone and ad- ditional phone can be switched.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."

Software update

General information The vehicle supports a large number of mo- bile devices, for example mobile phones and MP3 players. Software updates are available for many of the supported devices. The ve- hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle software updates.

Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop for information on available software updates.

Displaying the version of the installed software The software version installed in the vehicle is displayed.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Software update"

4. "Show current version"

If an update has been carried out before, se- lect the desired version to display additional information.

Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Store the file for the software update in the main directory of a USB storage de- vice.

2. Connecting USB storage devices to the USB port.

3. "My MINI"

4. "System settings"

5. "Software update"

6. "Update software"

Seite 58

AT A GLANCE General settings

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

7. "USB"

8. "Install software"

9. "OK"

10. Wait for the update to complete.

11. Confirm system restart.

Restoring the software version You can restore the software to the version prior to the last update or to its factory set- tings.

The software may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Software update"

4. "Restore software"

5. "Previous version"

The previous software version is re- stored.

"Default software settings"

The first software version is re- stored.

6. "Remove software"

7. "OK"

8. Wait for restore.

9. Confirm system restart.

Seite 59

General settings AT A GLANCE

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual:

Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 60.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi- cle, refer to page 60.

Printed Owner's Manual

Concept The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard, country-specific, and optional fea- tures offered with the series.

General information The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- tainment, and Communication can be ob- tained as a printed book from the service center.

Supplementary Owner's Manuals Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition to the onboard literature.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Concept The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display.

Selecting the Owner's Manual

1. Press the button.

2. "My MINI"

3. "Owner's Manual"

4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents.

Scrolling through the Owner's Manual Turn the Controller, until the next or previ- ous contents are displayed.

Context help

General information The section of the Owner's Manual relating to the function that is currently selected can be displayed directly.

Seite 60

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Opening via Central Information Display (CID) Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display:

1. Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display:

"Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To switch from a function, for instance radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:

1. Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to the last displayed function.

5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To alternate continuously between the last displayed function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General information The Owner's Manual can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly.

Storing 1. Select the desired entry point via the

Central Information Display (CID):

"Quick reference"

"Search by pictures"

"Keyword search"

"Animations"

2. Press and hold the desired but- ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing

Press the button.

The Owner's Manual is displayed immediately.

Seite 61

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

MINI eDRIVE

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

This MINI is an electric vehicle. The vehicle features a high-voltage system that consists of an electric motor and a high-voltage bat- tery among other things.

The eDRIVE system exhibits the following special features:

The vehicle is operated emissions free using its electrical drive system.

The special high-voltage battery sup- plies the electric motor as well as the comfort features with power.

The high-voltage battery is charged via a charging cable, for instance when parked or while driving by energy recov- ery.

The vehicle can be charged very rapidly at special charging stations. Charging is also possible at household power sock- ets.

On the go, the energy recovery ensures that only little energy is lost when brak- ing.

When the vehicle decelerates, the elec- tric motor acts as a generator and con-

verts the kinetic energy released into electric current.

As a result the high-voltage battery is partially recharged in order to reach maximum range.

Overview

1 Drive unit

2 Vehicle battery

3 High-voltage cables

4 Charging socket

5 High-voltage battery

Functions

Electric driving: eDRIVE The vehicle is powered exclusively by the electric motor. The accelerator pedal can be used not just for acceleration, but also for deceleration. When the vehicle decelerates, the electric motor acts as a generator and charges the high-voltage battery. With a sensible driving style, this function can be used for especially efficient energy recov- ery and comfortable driving, using just the accelerator pedal.

Seite 62

AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Acoustic pedestrian protection The system generates a continuous driving noise during electric driving at low speeds.

Coasting An especially efficient operating point is so- called coasting. In this case, the vehicle is decelerated only by driving resistance and no energy flows between high-voltage bat- tery and electric motor. In order to coast, depress the accelerator pedal far enough so that the pointer in the performance display, refer to page 120, is between the areas for ePOWER and CHARGE.

Energy recovery: CHARGE The high-voltage battery is charged while driving through energy recovery.

The electric motor acts as a generator and converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electrical energy.

Charging can take place in various situa- tions while the vehicle is in motion:

As soon as the accelerator pedal is only slightly depressed.

As soon as the accelerator pedal is not depressed.

The pointer in the instrument cluster is lo- cated in the CHARGE area.

Sensible driving and early speed reduction are important to make full use of the energy recovery feature.

Display

The eDRIVE displays, refer to page 120, provide information about the current state of the drive and visualize the system's use in a diagram.

Energy-saving driving and maximizing the range

Energy-saving driving is the basic prerequi- site for as large a range as possible. eDRIVE provides various functions that assist with an energy-saving driving style and help to monitor the range, and if needed, to in- crease it. The following descriptions provide an overview of the available functions and the personal measures.

Before driving eDRIVE allows use of the air conditioner even before driving off. The stationary cli- mate control, refer to page 184, provides more range than using full air conditioning while driving.

Parked vehicle ventilation during the charg- ing process can provide maximum range when driving off.

Trip planning and special functions of the navigation system Several special functions of the navigation system support trip planning taking into ac- count the electric range:

Range assistant, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual, checks whether an en- tered navigation destination can be reached. If the range is not sufficient, various recommendations to help in- crease the range are displayed automati- cally, for instance, a consumption opti- mized route based on driving in GREEN Mode is displayed.

Range map indicates the action range on the navigation map, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual.

Charging assistant under Points of In- terest in navigation, helps to find and possibly include a public charging sta-

Seite 63

MINI eDRIVE AT A GLANCE

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

tion in the desired route, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual.

During driving General driving tips, refer to page 212,

for increasing the range.

Use the eDRIVE system efficiently, refer to page 213, for an optimized driving style.

MINIMALISM Analyzer, refer to page 216, to analyze the driving style.

GREEN and GREEN +, refer to page 214, driving mode for increasing the range.

Information about auxiliary users and the range potential, refer to page 121.

After the trip Charge vehicle, refer to page 218, and

plan next trip.

Prepare for long downtimes, refer to page 266.

MINI Connected

The MINI Connected app provides mobility- based services and applications.

Safety of the high-voltage sys- tem

Follow the information on safety, refer to page 65.

Operating noises

Operating noises may occur due to the elec- trical system. For instance, they may occur in the following situations:

When cooling the high-voltage battery during the charging process.

When cooling the high-voltage battery with the drive-ready state switched on.

When climatizing the car's interior.

Long-term vehicle storage

Observe the information on vehicle storage and for longer idle periods, refer to page 266.

Seite 64

AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety of the high-voltage system

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Working on the vehicle

General information The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that no changes be made to the vehi- cle, for instance the retrofitting of accesso- ries, that will have an effect on the vehicles hybrid system.

Safety information

DANGER

Improperly performed work, in particular maintenance and repair on the high-volt- age system, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that the work on the vehicle, in par- ticular maintenance and repair, be per- formed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Contact with water

The high-voltage system is typically safe even in the following example situations:

Water in the floor area, for instance af- ter a rainstorm when the window was kept open.

Vehicle is in water but only up to the al- lowed height.

Fluid escapes in the cargo area.

Automatic deactivation

If an accident occurs, the high-voltage sys- tem is switched off automatically to prevent risk of danger to occupants and other traf- fic.

Read the information on What to do after an accident, refer to page 261.

Seite 65

Safety of the high-voltage system AT A GLANCE

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle key

General information The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle keys with integrated key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- tery, refer to page 69.

Depending on the equipment and country version, various settings, refer to page 78, can be configured for the button functions.

A personal driver profile, refer to page 75, for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.

To provide information on maintenance re- quirements, the service data is stored in the vehicle key, refer to page 248.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when ex- iting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock them- selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Seite 66

CONTROLS Opening and closing

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Overview

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 78, the following access points are unlocked.

Driver's door.

Press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

All doors and tailgate.

In addition, the following functions are exe- cuted:

Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig- nals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 78.

The settings stored in the driver profile, refer to page 75, are applied.

The interior lights, refer to page 139, and the MINI logo projection are switched on, provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually.

Depending on the settings, the welcome light and pathway lighting, refer to page 136, are switched on.

Exterior mirrors folded through conven- ient closing are folded open.

The alarm system, refer to page 79, is switched off.

The light functions may depend on the am- bient brightness.

Convenient opening Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking 1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

The following functions are executed:

All doors and the tailgate are locked.

Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be ac- tivated in the settings, refer to page 78.

The alarm system, refer to page 79, is switched on.

If the drive-ready state is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.

Seite 67

Opening and closing CONTROLS

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

With Comfort Access: convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key in the area close to the ve- hicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Switch on interior lights and courtesy light

Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switched on.

These functions are not available if the inte- rior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the am- bient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before press- ing the button again.

Tailgate

General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, re- fer to page 78.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- ing. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press and hold the button on the ve- hicle key for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Seite 68

CONTROLS Opening and closing

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 sec- onds.

Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Replacing the battery 1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-

hicle key, refer to page 71.

2. Slide the integrated key into the open- ing and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.

4. Push battery in the direction of the ar- row using a pointed object and lift it out.

5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the positive side facing up.

6. Insert lid and cover.

7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keys Additional vehicle keys are available from a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keys A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re- placed by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Malfunction

General information A Check Control message is displayed.

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circum- stances:

Seite 69

Opening and closing CONTROLS

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The battery of the vehicle key is dis- charged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 69.

Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with metal objects.

Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehi- cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with electronic devices.

Interference of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone.

The vehicle key is in direct proximity of the wireless charging tray.

Place the vehicle key in a different loca- tion.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 70.

Switching on the drive-ready state via emergency detection of the vehicle key

It is not possible to switch on the drive- ready state if the vehicle key has not been detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark on the steering column as shown. Pay attention to the display in the instru- ment cluster.

2. If the vehicle key is detected:

Switch on drive-ready state within 10 seconds.

If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure.

Frequently Asked Questions What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in vehicle key?

The options provided by the Remote Services of the MINI Connected app in- clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve- hicle.

This requires an active MINI Connected contract and the MINI Connected app must be installed on a smartphone.

Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract is required.

Integrated key

General information The driver's door can be locked and un- locked without the vehicle key using the integrated key.

Seite 70

CONTROLS Opening and closing

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the door lock 1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid.

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm system The alarm system is not switched on if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un- locked via the door lock.

Buttons for the central locking system

General information In the event of a severe accident, the vehi- cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Seite 71

Opening and closing CONTROLS

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.

Unlocking Press the button.

Opening

Press button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest.

Comfort Access

Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operat- ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- cle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

General information Comfort Access supports the following functions:

Unlocking and locking the vehicle.

Convenient closing.

Open the tailgate.

Functional requirements To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must

be outside of the vehicle near the doors.

The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 sec- onds.

Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 78, only the driver's door may be un- locked. Unlike when unlocking using the ve- hicle key, pressing the button on the outer door handle again does not unlock the other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again.

If the vehicle was locked automatically after driving off or with the button of the central locking system from the inside, note the fol- lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is opened from the inside with the door opener, pressing the button on the outer door handle will first lock the vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the outer door han- dle must be pressed again.

Seite 72

CONTROLS Opening and closing

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the driv- er's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

To open the tailgate

General information If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- ing. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Seite 73

Opening and closing CONTROLS

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Opening

Press button next on tailgate.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Malfunction Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circum- stances:

The battery of the vehicle key is dis- charged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 69.

Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with metal objects.

Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehi- cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to- gether with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve- hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to page 70.

Tailgate

General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- cle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, re- fer to page 78.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail- gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv- ing. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Seite 74

CONTROLS Opening and closing

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Opening and closing

Opening from the outside

Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press button next on tailgate.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking with the ve- hicle key, refer to page 68.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.

Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, press the button in the driver's floor area.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, press the button in the driver's floor area twice in quick succession.

Closing

Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

Driver profiles

Concept In the driver profiles, individual settings for several drivers can be stored and called up again when required.

General information There are three driver profiles with which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev- ery vehicle key has been assigned one of these driver profiles.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle key, the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own vehicle keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set- tings as it is being unlocked. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different vehicle key.

Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently acti- vated.

If another driver profile is selected via the Central Information Display (CID), the set-

Seite 75

Opening and closing CONTROLS

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

tings stored in it will be applied automati- cally. The new driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key that is currently in use.

There is an additional guest profile available that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver pro- files.

Functional requirements For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the detected vehicle key must be clearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

The driver is only carrying his or her own vehicle key.

The driver unlocks the vehicle.

The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door.

Adjusting The settings for the following systems and functions are stored in the active profile. The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment.

Unlocking and locking.

Lights.

Radio.

Instrument cluster.

Programmable memory buttons.

Volumes, tone.

Control Display.

Climate control.

Navigation.

PDC Park Distance Control.

Rearview camera.

Head-up Display.

MINI Driving Modes.

Intelligent Safety.

Profile management

Selecting a driver profile Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif- ferent driver profile may be activated. This allows you to call up personal vehicle set- tings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your own vehicle key.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

4. "OK"

All settings stored in the selected driver profile are automatically applied.

The called-up driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key being used at the time.

If the driver profile is already assigned to a different vehicle key, this driver profile will apply to both vehicle keys.

Using a guest profile The guest profile is for individual settings that are stored in none of the three personal driver profiles.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. "Drive off (guest)"

4. "OK"

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is assigned to the vehicle key that is not used at the time.

Renaming a driver profile A personal name can be assigned to the ac- tive driver profile to avoid confusion be- tween the driver profiles.

Seite 76

CONTROLS Opening and closing

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be renamed.

4. "Change driver profile name"

5. Enter profile name.

6. Select the symbol.

Resetting a driver profile The settings of the driver profile currently in use are reset to their factory settings.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be reset.

4. "Reset driver profile"

5. "OK"

Exporting driver profiles Most settings of the active driver profile can be exported.

Exporting is helpful when storing and re- trieving personal settings, for instance be- fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver profiles can be taken into another vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be exported.

4. "Export driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

Importing driver profiles Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be imported via the USB port.

The existing settings of the active driver profile are overwritten with the settings of the imported driver profile.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.

The driver profile marked with this symbol can be overwritten.

4. "Import driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

5. Select the driver profile to be imported.

Displaying driver profiles during start The driver profiles can be displayed at each startup to select the desired profile.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. "Show driver profiles at startup"

System limits A clear assignment between the vehicle key and driver may not be possible in the fol- lowing cases, for example.

The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own vehicle key, but another person is driving.

The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com- fort Access and has multiple vehicle keys with him or her.

The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked.

Seite 77

Opening and closing CONTROLS

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Multiple vehicle keys are located out- side of the vehicle.

Adjusting

General information Depending on the package and country ver- sion, various settings are available for the vehicle key functions.

These settings are stored for the driver pro- file, refer to page 75, currently used.

Unlocking

Doors Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"

5. Select the desired setting:

"Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door is unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire ve- hicle.

"All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Tailgate Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4.

The text next to the symbol indicates the current setting.

5. Select the desired setting:

"Tailgate"

Only the tailgate is unlocked.

"Tailgate and door(s)"

The tailgate and the doors are un- locked.

"Tailgate opens after unlocking"

The vehicle must be unlocked before the tailgate can be used with the ve- hicle key.

"Button lock"

It is not possible to use the tailgate via the vehicle key.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, this setting may not be of- fered.

Automatic locking Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Select the desired setting:

"Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically after a while if no door is opened after un- locking.

"Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Automatic unlocking Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Unlock at end of trip"

Seite 78

CONTROLS Opening and closing

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

After drive-ready state is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically un- locked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Deactivate or activate the desired con- firmation signals.

"Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one.

With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

Alarm system

General information When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes:

Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.

Movements in the car's interior.

Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.

Disconnected battery voltage.

Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the socket for the OBD On-

board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 249.

The alarm system signals these changes vis- ually and acoustically:

Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed.

Visual alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning sys- tem and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure func- tion of the alarm system.

Overview

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/off The alarm system is switched on or off as soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi- cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.

Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock.

Switching off the alarm, refer to page 80.

Seite 79

Opening and closing CONTROLS

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 sec- onds.

Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Signals of the indicator light The indicator light flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor- rectly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

The indicator light goes out after un- locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

The indicator light flashes after unlock- ing until standby state is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un- authorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

In automatic vehicle washes.

In duplex garages.

During transport on trains carrying ve- hicles, at sea or on a trailer.

With animals in the vehicle.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo- tion sensor can be switched off in such sit- uations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.

Seite 80

CONTROLS Opening and closing

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and activate the standby state via emergency detection of the vehicle key, refer to page 69.

With Comfort Access: if you have the vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle using the button on the driver's side or passenger side door.

Power windows

General information If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed ex- cept a gap.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Power windows

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point.

The window opens while the switch is being held.

Press the switch beyond the resist- ance point.

The window opens automatically. Press- ing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key, refer to page 67.

Closing

Pull the switch to the resistance point.

The window closes while the switch is being held.

Pull the switch beyond the resist- ance point.

The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re- fer to page 68.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 73.

Jam protection system

Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed.

General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing action is interrupted.

Seite 81

Opening and closing CONTROLS

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The window opens slightly.

Safety information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as an- tennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection system In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam pro- tection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is inter- rupted.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protec- tion.

Malfunction

General information In certain situations a window can only be operated to a limited extent.

After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case.

The power window motors are equipped with overheating protection. If a win- dow is opened and closed several times within a short period of time, the over-

heating protection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the de- gree of overheating, it may only be pos- sible to close the window or it may not be possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.

Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the ve- hicle is stationary and the drive-ready state is switched on.

During initialization, the affected window closes without jam protection.

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. Pull the switch to the resistance point and hold.

The window closes.

3. Continue holding the switch pulled to the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend- ing on the vehicle's equipment.

4. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General information In the event of a severe accident, the glass sunroof is automatically closed.

Seite 82

CONTROLS Opening and closing

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Tilting the glass sunroof Press back the switch up to or beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and re- lease it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Slide switch back to the re- sistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.

Press the switch back beyond the resist- ance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo- tion.

Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the auto- matic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glass sunroof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open Slide switch forward to the

resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised position.

Press the switch forward beyond the re- sistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo- tion.

Press the switch forward beyond the re- sistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Seite 83

Opening and closing CONTROLS

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Pressing the switch again stops the mo- tion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Press the switch forward be- yond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts from becoming jammed between the roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun- roof is closing.

General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos- ing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection system If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resist- ance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force ex- ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in- terrupted.

2. Push the switch forward again past the resistance point and hold until the glass

sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power interruption After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI rec- ommends having this work performed only by a dealer's service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop.

Seite 84

CONTROLS Opening and closing

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Sitting safely

An ideal seating position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat- ing position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters:

Seats, refer to page 85.

Safety belts, refer to page 87.

Head restraints, refer to page 89.

Airbags, refer to page 141.

Front seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehi- cle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driv- er's side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid- ing under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Adjusting seats

Overview

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Seite 85

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de- sired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for- ward or back slightly making sure it en- gages properly.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lum- bar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or de- crease the curvature.

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad- just the thigh support.

Entering the rear

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Seite 86

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur if the rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of in- jury. Fold back and lock the rear seat back- rests before driving.

Fold the seat backrest forward 1. Pull lever up to the stop.

2. Fold the seat backrest forward.

3. Push the seat forward.

Original position The driver's seat features a mechanical memory function for forward/back and backrest adjustment.

1. Push the seat back into the original po- sition.

2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

If the backrest is folded back when the seat is not yet in the original position, the seat engages in the current position. In this case, manually adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 86.

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching on

Press the button once for each tem- perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti- vated automatically with the temperature selected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to page 214, the heating output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button until the LEDs go out.

Safety belts

Number of safety belts and safety belt buckles The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted cor- rectly.

Seite 87

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

General information Always make sure that safety belts are be- ing worn by all occupants before driving off. Although airbags enhance safety by provid- ing added protection, they are not a substi- tute for safety belts.

If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear from the belt buckle on the side.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the abil- ity of the safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injuries or dan- ger to life. Do not allow more than one per- son to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occu- pant's lap, but must be transported and se- cured in designated child restraint sys- tems.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occu- pants are wearing safety belts correctly.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations:

The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way.

Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten- sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight

to your body over your lap and should- ers.

Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach.

Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.

Avoid thick clothing.

Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up- ward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over

shoulder and hip to put it on.

Seite 88

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly.

Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll- up mechanism.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be acti- vated if objects are placed on the front pas- senger seat.

Safety belt reminder for rear seats

General information The safety belt reminder is automatically activated each time the drive-ready state is switched on.

The safety belt reminder is also activated when a passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt during the trip.

Display in the instrument cluster The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates after switching on the drive- ready state.

Symbol Description

Green: the safety belt is buckled on the corresponding rear seat.

Red: the safety belt is not buck- led on the corresponding rear seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re- moved or not correctly adjusted head re- straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.

Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Seite 89

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use seat or head restraint cov- ers.

Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.

Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.

Do not use any accessories, for in- stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest forward.

2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re- moved or not correctly adjusted head re- straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.

Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Seite 90

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use seat or head restraint cov- ers.

Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.

Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.

Do not use any accessories, for in- stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Fold down

To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, ar- row 2.

Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages cor- rectly.

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 203, in question.

2. Pull head restraint up against the resist- ance.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Seite 91

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Safety information

Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traf- fic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.

Overview

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon- itor

3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

Press the button.

The mirror movement follows the button movement.

Malfunction In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir- ror glass.

Folding in and out

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi- cle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Be- fore washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

Press the button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap- prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations:

In vehicle washes.

On narrow roads.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the standby state is switched on.

Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior mirror, refer to page 93, are used to control this.

Seite 92

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror

Concept If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted down- ward. This improves your view of the curb and other formatting issue - low-lying ob- stacles when parking, for instance.

Activating

1. slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir- ror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

In the mirror glass.

On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements Keep the photocells clean.

Do not cover the area between the inte- rior mirror and the windshield.

Seite 93

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the vehicle is sta- tionary only.

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer- red height and angle to suit your seating position.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 94

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

The right place for children

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

A heated vehicle may result in death to persons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave persons, especially children, or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their compo- nents to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehi- cle.

Always transport children in the rear seat

General information Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat.

Transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size.

Seite 95

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The safety belt cannot be fastened cor- rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened in- correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in- stance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- juries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger seat

General information Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passen- ger side are deactivated. For automatic de- activation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 143.

Safety information

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- jure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front- seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- tor light lights up.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re- straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint sys- tems

General information Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child re- straint systems.

In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system in the rear:

Move the front passenger seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint sys- tems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an acci- dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot be properly restrained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Seite 96

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an acci- dent.

If a child restraint system and its fasten- ing system has been damaged or exposed to an accident, have these systems checked and replaced by the dealer's serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re- straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

On the rear seats In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system:

Move the front passenger seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- jure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front- seat passenger airbags are deactivated and

that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- tor light lights up.

Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 143.

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat care- fully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passen- ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system with the safety belt.

Seite 97

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com- pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil- dren.

Pay attention to the operating and safety in- formation from the child restraint system manufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com- bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys- tems are not correctly engaged, the protec- tive effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely en- gaged and that the LATCH child restraint

fixing system fits securely against the backrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.

Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Install child restraint system, see manu-

facturer's information.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly engaged.

Child restraint systems with tether strap

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor.

Seite 98

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Warning

If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro- tective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In certain situa- tions, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked.

NOTICE

The anchors for the upper retaining straps of child restraint systems are only pro- vided for these retaining straps. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only mount child restraint systems to the upper anchors.

Anchors

The respective symbol shows the an- chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Seat backrest

6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.

2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain- ing strap between or along both sides of the supports of the head restraint to the anchor.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the rear seat.

4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

Seite 99

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Start/Stop button

Concept Pressing the Start/Stop button switches standby state on or off.

Drive-ready state is switched on when you depress the

brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.

Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches drive-ready state back off and radio-ready state is switched back on.

The drive-ready state cannot be activated as long as the charging cable is connected, re- fer to page 218.

Radio-ready state Some electronic systems/power consumers are ready for operation.

The radio-ready state is switched off auto- matically:

If the driver's or front passenger door is opened when exiting the vehicle, with drive-ready state switched off manually.

After approx. 8 minutes.

When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.

If the charge state of the batteries is low.

Radio-ready state remains active if, for in- stance drive-ready state is automatically switched off for the following reasons:

Opening or closing the driver's door.

Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.

When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights.

Radio-ready state is also switched back on if the on/off button on the radio is pressed when the vehicle is parked.

If drive-ready state is switched on: the sys- tem automatically switches to radio-ready state when the driver's door is opened and the driver's safety belt is unbuckled if the lights are switched off or the daytime run- ning lights are switched on.

Standby state All electronic systems/power consumers are ready for operation. Odometer and trip od- ometer are displayed in the instrument clus- ter.

To preserve the battery, use standby state and activated power features only as long as absolutely necessary.

Turning on standby state Pressing the Start/Stop button switches standby state on or off.

Standby state is switched off automatically:

Seite 100

CONTROLS Driving

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

When locking the vehicle, even if the low beams are switched on.

When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is un- buckled and the low beams are switched off.

While the driver's safety belt is unbuck- led with driver's door open and low beams off.

When the batteries' state of charge is low, if the low beams are switched off.

The low beams switch to parking lights after approx. 15 minutes of no use.

When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats.

Drive-ready state Activated drive-ready state is the equiva- lent of a running engine in conventional ve- hicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is equivalent to switching the engine off.

If drive-ready state is switched on, the vehi- cle ready to drive and the pointer in the in- strument cluster is on READY signal, refer to page 101.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when parking, switch off drive-ready state and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

The drive-ready state is switched off auto- matically if the driver's safety belt is not buckled when the driver's door is opened.

Safety information

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when drive-ready state is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch drive-ready state off in vehicle washes.

Drive-ready state in detail

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

Switching on drive-ready state 1. Close the driver's door.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Drive-ready state is switched on.

Seite 101

Driving CONTROLS

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Display in the instrument cluster The READY display indicates that the vehicle is ready for driving.

Driving off

Functional requirements Driving is possible under the following con- ditions:

The high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged.

The driver's door is closed.

State of charge in strong temperature fluctuations In the case of strong temperature fluctua- tions and a low state of charge of the high- voltage battery, it may not be possible to start the vehicle again at the beginning of the next trip. Recharge vehicle with low state of charge in time.

Driving 1. Switch on drive-ready state.

2. Apply the brake and engage the selector lever in position D or R.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive.

Selector lever positions

The engaged selector lever position is dis- played on the selector lever.

D Drive Position for normal vehicle operation.

R is reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to page 103, in selector lever position N.

P Park Engage only while the vehicle is stationary and the brake is applied. The drive wheels are blocked.

Selector lever position P is engaged auto- matically in the following situations:

If the driver's safety belt is off, the driv- er's door is open and neither brake nor accelerator pedal are depressed while drive-ready state is switched on and se- lector lever position D or R is set.

After switching off drive-ready state via the Start/Stop button, if selector lever position D or R is set.

With standby state switched off.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move. On uphill

Seite 102

CONTROLS Driving

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

grades, also Set parking brake, refer to page 107.

Engaging selector lever positions

General information Interlock: the selector lever position P

can be exited only with drive-ready state engaged.

Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift com- mand will not be executed.

Shift lock: before shifting out of P, re- move the charging cable from the vehi- cle; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed.

Engage D, N, R A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation:

Unintentional shifting into selector lever position R.

Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.

1. Press and hold the button to release the selector lever lock.

2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push the selector lever in the de- sired direction, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automati-

cally returns to the center position when released.

Engaging P

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N 1. Switch on drive-ready state while press-

ing on the brake pedal.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Engage selector lever position N.

5. Switch off drive-ready state.

In this way, standby state remains switched on, and a Check Control mes- sage is displayed.

Seite 103

Driving CONTROLS

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The vehicle can roll.

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when standby state is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch standby state off in vehicle washes.

Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever position P is automatically engaged af- ter approx. 15 minutes.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed.

Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock

General information Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

Engaging selector lever position N 1. Hold the Start/Stop button pressed.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Press and hold the selector lever in posi- tion N.

A corresponding Check Control message is displayed.

4. Press the selector lever again into posi- tion N within approx. 2 seconds.

Position N is indicated on the selector lever.

5. Release Start/Stop button and brake.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own.

Switching off drive-ready state Park the vehicle. Noises from the electrical system such as for cooling the high-voltage system might still be audible.

After stopping the vehicle:

1. Apply brake and engage the selector lever in position P.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The READY indicator goes out and a signal sounds.

In case of longer idle times, follow the instructions in the Care chapter, refer to page 266.

Driving in detail: eDRIVE

Safety information

DANGER

The braking power of the electric motor can be stronger than for a vehicle with combustion engine. Abrupt braking and slow-down may confuse other traffic. There is a risk of accident. Carefully re- lease the accelerator pedal. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Seite 104

CONTROLS Driving

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Warning

When driving in electric mode, pedes- trians and other traffic might pay less at- tention to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter- vene where appropriate.

Warning

Without energy recovery, there is no brak- ing power of the electric motor available. The vehicle could roll further than antici- pated. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Accelerator pedal positions

1 Deceleration

2 Coasting

3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePO- WER

Deceleration Releasing the accelerator pedal causes de- celeration similar to cautious braking. Addi- tionally, the brake lights will come on with- out hitting the brakes.

The degree of the deceleration depends on the energy recovery, refer to page 106, set- ting.

During the deceleration, energy is recov- ered and the high-voltage battery is charged.

Energy recovery: CHARGE The high-voltage battery is recharged in part through energy recovery. The electric motor acts as a generator when decelerating and converts the kinetic energy into electri- cal energy.

Energy can be recovered if the following conditions are met:

The vehicle is moving.

Speed higher than approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.

Selector lever position D or R is set.

Accelerator pedal is not actuated or only pressed down one third of the way.

Energy cannot be recovered in the following situations:

Selector lever position N is engaged.

While drive stability control systems, for instance DTC, are active and control- ling the vehicle, even though this is not indicated by an indicator light.

The high-voltage battery is fully charged.

When temperature of the high-voltage battery is very low or very high.

In winter it might be possible that the energy recovery is temporarily unavaila- ble after startup.

Exemplary traffic situations If a deceleration operation is foreseeable while driving, this can be used for energy recovery.

The following exemplary driving situations may be suitable:

Seite 105

Driving CONTROLS

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Decelerating downhill.

Deceleration before a red light.

Avoid late or abrupt braking. Instead, decel- erate the vehicle using energy recovery.

Set energy recovery

Concept The energy recovery is adjustable.

High energy recovery: the vehicle decel- erates faster, more energy is returned to the high-voltage battery.

Low energy recovery: the vehicle decel- erates more slowly, less energy is re- turned to the high-voltage battery.

Overview

Energy recovery

Adjusting

Press the button up or down.

LED off: high energy recovery.

LED illuminated: low energy recovery.

The setting is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Coasting The electric drive makes it possible to roll without consuming energy. This driving condition is referred to as coasting.

Proactive driving reduces energy consump- tion and increases the range.

With vehicle rolling, no energy is recov- ered.

Exemplary traffic situations If a route can be traveled without antici- pated need for braking, it is advantageous to roll.

The following exemplary driving situations may be suitable:

Rolling on a straight downhill route without obstacles.

Coasting on a route without obstacles.

Avoid late or abrupt braking.

Acoustic pedestrian protection The system generates a continuous driving noise during electric driving up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the surroundings.

As a result, other road users, for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better perceive the vehicle.

Heavily discharged high-voltage battery If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis- charged during the trip, the performance and some comfort features are reduced step-by-step to extend the range.

Heated high-voltage battery

With a stationary vehicle In isolated cases, when the vehicle is sta- tionary, it is possible for the high-voltage battery to overheat, for instance, as a result of extreme hot or cold temperatures or di- rect sunlight. Drive-ready state cannot be

Seite 106

CONTROLS Driving

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

switched on if the high-voltage battery is overheated.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Another message will indicate when drive- ready state is available again.

While driving If the high-voltage battery overheats during the trip, the performance is reduced step- by-step in order to cool down the battery. The ePOWER performance display in the in- strument cluster decreases. If the tempera- ture increases further, park the vehicle until the high-voltage battery has cooled down. If the performance display falls to 0, the drive- ready state is switched off and the vehicle comes to a stop.

Parking brake

Concept The parking brake is used to prevent the ve- hicle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- cured against rolling away, follow the fol- lowing:

Set the parking brake.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the di- rection of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- stance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for in- stance due to the following actions:

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

Parking brake

Setting

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED lights up.

The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, the parking brake is engaged automatically.

Seite 107

Driving CONTROLS

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

In some parking situations, the parking brake is automatically engaged, when selec- tor lever position P is engaged. In these cases, the parking brake is released auto- matically when you leave the selector lever position P.

While driving To use as emergency brake while driving:

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.

The indicator light lights up red, a signal sounds and the brake lights light up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing

Releasing manually 1. Switch on standby state.

2. Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever posi- tion P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release For automatic release, step on the accelera- tor pedal.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator pedal un- der the following conditions:

Standby state switched on.

Drive mode engaged.

Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Malfunction If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure the vehicle against rolling before ex- iting.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for instance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehicle.

After a power failure

Re-activating the parking brake 1. Switch on standby state.

2. Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever posi- tion P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as- sociated with this process are normal.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the park- ing brake is ready for operation.

Hold function

Concept The system holds the vehicle automatically when gear is engaged. This prevents rolling against the direction of travel.

In selector lever position D, the vehicle can- not roll backwards. In selector lever posi- tion R, it cannot roll forward. The brake pedal does not have to be pressed.

Reducing energy consumption To reduce energy consumption when the hold function is activated, activate the park- ing brake or engage the selector lever in po- sition P when the vehicle is stopped for long periods of time.

Seite 108

CONTROLS Driving

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The hold function can be affected by the ve- hicle's load and the road incline. If needed, a Check Control message will appear and po- sition P will be selected automatically.

Turn signal, high beams, head- light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off man- ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be ad- justed.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "One-touch turn signal"

6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Malfunction Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

High beams off/headlight flasher, ar- row 2.

Wiper system

General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Seite 109

Driving CONTROLS

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

Resting position of the wipers, posi- tion 0.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor, position 1.

Normal wiper speed, position 2.

Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.

Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its in- itial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the in- tensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, di- rectly in front of the interior mirror. With- out the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Seite 110

CONTROLS Driving

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating

Press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.

Deactivating Press the lever back into the standard posi- tion.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter- val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win- dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti- freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Seite 111

Driving CONTROLS

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are auto- matically heated while standby state is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on Turn the outer switch upward.

Resting position of the wiper, posi- tion 0.

Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- verse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direc- tion.

In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch auto- matically returns to its idle position when released.

In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automati- cally returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property.

Seite 112

CONTROLS Driving

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers 1. Switch standby state on and off again.

2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un- til the wipers stop in a close to vertical position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.

2. Switch on standby state.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Canada: wiper system

General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist- ance point.

Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

Seite 113

Driving CONTROLS

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

To switch off from fast wiper speed: press down twice.

To switch off from normal wiper speed: press down once.

Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the in- tensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, di- rectly in front of the interior mirror. With- out the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to prop- erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.

If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen- sor switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically activated again.

Seite 114

CONTROLS Driving

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter- val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win- dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti- freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are auto- matically heated while standby state is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on Turn the outer switch upward.

Resting position of the wiper, posi- tion 0.

Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- verse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Seite 115

Driving CONTROLS

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direc- tion.

In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch auto- matically returns to its idle position when released.

In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automati- cally returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property.

Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press the wiper lever up past the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.

2. Switch on standby state.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Seite 116

CONTROLS Driving

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Washer fluid

General information All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning

Some antifreeze agents can contain harm- ful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ra- tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allow- able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.

Use of BMWs Windshield Washer Con- centrate or the equivalent is recom- mended.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the wash- ing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add silicon-containing ad- ditives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer con- centrates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not mix different wind- shield washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixing ratios provided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

Malfunction The use of undiluted windshield washer concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 /-15 .

Seite 117

Driving CONTROLS

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Instrument cluster

Overview

1 Performance display 120

2 Display/reset miles 124

3 Electronic displays 119

Charging screen 119

4 Vehicle speed

5 Indicator/warning lights

6 High-voltage battery charge indica- tor 120

Seite 118

CONTROLS Displays

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Electronic displays

1 Selector lever position 101

2 Time 125

MINI Driving Modes switch sta- tus 164

3 Driver assistance systems

4 External temperature 125

Range 125

5 Messages, for instance Check Control

Selection lists 128

Navigation instructions

6 Total miles/trip odometer 124

Onboard Computer 129

Charging screen

Overview

1 Stationary climate control 225

2 Charging status 225

Current range

3 Maximum range

4 End of charging time 225

Departure time with timer 225

5 Departure time with timer 225

Seite 119

Displays CONTROLS

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Displays of the eDRIVE sys- tem

Displays in the instrument cluster

Concept The display depends on the system's operat- ing condition. The following functions of the eDRIVE system are shown in the instru- ment cluster

High-voltage battery charge indicator.

Performance display.

Drive-ready state: READY.

High-voltage battery charge indicator

Display

The fill level bars indicate the available charge state of the high-voltage battery when standby state and drive-ready state are switched on.

Safety information

Warning

Even when it is indicated that the high- voltage battery is discharged, the high- voltage system is always still under high voltage. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch or change live parts, for instance orange high-voltage cables, even when the batteries are discharged.

Performance display

Concept

A pointer indicates the power output in a scale.

The efficient range for electric driving ePO- WER and energy recovery CHARGE is shown in yellow.

General information

Depending on the available power, the effi- cient range for electric driving ePOWER is adjusted automatically.

The efficient range for energy recovery de- pends on the settings via the button for the energy recovery. Set energy recovery, refer to page 106.

The available power may be reduced due to the following factors:

Heavily discharged high-voltage battery.

Extreme external temperatures.

When driving on steep inclines, with a sporty driving style or in other high- power driving conditions.

Optimizing the driving style, refer to page 213.

Display

Pointer in the CHARGE range, arrow 1: dis- play for energy recovery by coasting or when decelerating:

Both LEDs are illuminated yellow: high energy recovery.

One LED is illuminated yellow: low en- ergy recovery.

Pointer in the ePOWER range, arrow 2: effi- cient acceleration.

Seite 120

CONTROLS Displays

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Drive-ready state: READY

The READY display indicates that the vehicle is ready for driving. Drive-ready state in detail, refer to page 101.

Indications on the Control Display

Energy flow of the eDRIVE system

General information

The display shows the eDRIVE system while driving or charging the vehicle:

Yellow: electrical energy.

Arrow: direction of the energy flow.

The operating states, such as eDRIVE, are displayed.

Displaying the energy flow

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "eDRIVE"

Auxiliary users

General information

The following information is displayed:

If necessary, information about settings for energy recovery.

Range potential when switching off in- dividual auxiliary users.

Current range.

With split screen: show auxiliary user

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "eDRIVE"

Without split screen: show auxiliary user

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "Comfort information"

Check Control

Concept The Check Control system monitors func- tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal- functions in the monitored systems.

General information A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be out- put and a SMS text message may appear on the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lights

General information The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready state is established.

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illumi- nated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The

safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Seite 121

Displays CONTROLS

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Make sure that the safety belts are posi- tioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner may not be working.

Have the vehicle checked immedi- ately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, re- fer to page 108.

Approach control warning

Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a

collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Increase the distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the ve- hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela- tively high differential speed.

Intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Person warning

If a collision with a detected person is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System ABS

The Brake Assistant function may not activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance

into account.

Have the system immediately checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC con- trols the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal- functioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer's serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 162.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti- vated.

DSC, refer to page 162, and DTC, re- fer to page 163.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The FTM signals a loss of tire infla- tion pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cau- tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 150.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light illuminates: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.

Seite 122

CONTROLS Displays

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Follow the information in the Check Control message.

The indicator light flashes and is then illu- minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres- sure losses cannot be detected.

Interference caused by systems or devi- ces with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.

A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a deal- ers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 145.

Steering system

Steering system may not be working.

Have the system checked by a deal- er's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive

Acoustic pedestrian protection de- fective.

Have the system checked by a deal- er's service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indi- cator light indicates that a turn sig-

nal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 109.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights are switched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, refer to page 135.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on.

Front fog lights, refer to page 138.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traf-

fic situation.

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 137.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It main- tains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering

wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on.

High beams, refer to page 109.

Seite 123

Displays CONTROLS

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Continuous display Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several mal- functions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis- played again automatically.

Temporary display Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored.

SMS text messages SMS text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Depending on the Check Control message, further help can be selected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the desired text message.

5. Select the desired setting.

Messages after trip completion Certain messages displayed while driving are displayed again after standby state is switched off.

Odometer and trip odometer

Concept The total mileage driven and the mileage driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Seite 124

CONTROLS Displays

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Reset trip distance Press the button.

The odometer is displayed when the standby state is switched off.

When standby state is switched on, the trip od- ometer is reset.

External temperature

General information If the indicator drops to +37 /+3 , a sig- nal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 /+3 there can be a risk of icy roads, for in- stance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather condi- tions at low temperatures.

Display The external temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Time

The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Set the time on the Central In- formation Display (CID), refer to page 48.

Date

The date is displayed in the in- strument cluster.

Set the date on the Central In- formation Display (CID), refer to page 49.

Range

General information Always make sure that the range is suffi- cient for the planned trip. The range is dy- namic and can abruptly change.

The range can be abruptly reduced or in- creased based on the following factors:

Driving style.

Traffic conditions.

Program changes via the MINI Driving Modes switch.

Climate and terrain conditions.

Automatic climate control settings.

After identification of a route through the navigation system depending on the route profile, route distance and se- lected speed.

When exiting a route or recalculating a route.

Further information about the topic In- creasing the range, refer to page 212.

Seite 125

Displays CONTROLS

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Check Control messages indicate a limited range.

Display The expected range for the en- ergy stored in the high-volt- age battery is continuously displayed in the instrument cluster.

Heavily discharged high-voltage battery

The high-voltage battery is heavily discharged. Its power output will be reduced. Heat- ing and climate control func- tions will be deactivated. In this state, the exact range can

no longer be calculated. A short range may still be available depending on the environ- mental conditions.

State of charge in strong temperature fluctuations In the case of strong temperature fluctua- tions and a low state of charge of the high- voltage battery, it may not be possible to start the vehicle again at the beginning of the next trip. Recharge vehicle with low state of charge in time.

Service notifications

Concept The function displays the service notifica- tions and the corresponding maintenance scopes.

General information The driving distance or the time to the next scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly

in the instrument cluster after standby state is switched on.

A service advisor can read out the current service notifications from your vehicle key.

Display

Detailed information on service notifications More information on the type of service re- quired may be displayed on the Control Dis- play.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Maintenance and service measures and legally mandated inspections are dis- played.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor- mation.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re- quired.

The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is ap- proaching.

The service deadline has al- ready passed.

Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

Seite 126

CONTROLS Displays

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. "Vehicle inspection"

5. "Date:"

6. Select the desired setting.

Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automati- cally transmitted to your dealers service center before your vehicle is due for serv- ice.

You can check when your dealers service center was notified.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Teleservice Call"

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

Concept Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi- mum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

General information The camera at the base of the interior mir- ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road con- ditions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as

from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation.

With the navigation system, the system takes into account the information stored in the navigation data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Display Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

Seite 127

Displays CONTROLS

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected.

With navigation system: Speed Limit Info is not availa- ble.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

When traffic signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers or paint.

When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.

When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections.

When the windshield in front of the in- terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- ered by a sticker, etc.

In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.

If the speed limits stored in the naviga- tion system are incorrect.

In areas not covered by the navigation system.

When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing.

When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.

If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the buttons on the steering wheel and the dis- play in the instrument cluster can be used to display or use the following:

Current audio source.

Phone redial.

Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button on the steering wheel

Function

Move selection up.

Move selection down.

Confirm the selec- tion.

Display

Seite 128

CONTROLS Displays

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Onboard Computer

Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as average values.

Calling up information

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following informa- tion:

Average consumption.

Average speed.

Charge state of the high-voltage battery.

Date.

Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Trip odometer.

The unit of some information can be changed.

Setting units, refer to page 49.

Selecting information Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select what information from the On- board Computer can be accessed in the in- strument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Information in detail

Display of charge state of the high- voltage battery as a percentage

The current charge state of the high-voltage battery can be displayed as a %-value.

Average consumption The average consumption is calculated on the basis of various distances. Periods when the vehicle is parked with driveready state switched off are not considered.

Average speed Periods when the vehicle is parked with drive-ready state switched off are not in- cluded when calculating average speed.

Seite 129

Displays CONTROLS

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Resetting average values

Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever.

Distance to destination Depending on the vehicle equipment, the distance remaining to the destination is dis- played if a destination is entered in the nav- igation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adopted automatically.

Time of arrival Depending on the vehicle equipment, the estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation sys- tem before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.

Onboard Computer on the Control Display

Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data on the Control Display, such as average values.

General information Two types of Onboard Computers are availa- ble on the Control Display:

"Onboard info": average values, such as the consumption, are displayed. The val- ues can be reset individually.

"Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a specific route and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the Onboard Computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info"

4. "Consumption" or "Speed"

5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Trip computer"

4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.

"Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi- cle has come to a standstill.

5. If necessary, "OK"

Speed warning

Concept A speed limit can be set that when reached will cause a warning to be issued.

Seite 130

CONTROLS Displays

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

General information The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Adjusting Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Warning at:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as the speed warning Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central in- strument cluster

Concept The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.

Basic displays Basic functions, such as the state of charge of the high-voltage battery, can be set to be displayed continually if so desired.

Event displays Functions that are only displayed tempora- rily, for instance the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis- play corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.

Switching on/off LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Basic display" or "Event display"

6. Select the desired setting.

Setting the brightness The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

Seite 131

Displays CONTROLS

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Head-up Display

Concept This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.

The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road.

General information Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up Display. For additional informa- tion, see the chapter on care.

Safety information

Warning

When extending and retracting the projec- tion screen of the Head-up Display, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in- jury. Make sure that the area of movement of the projection screen is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The Head-up Display consists of sensitive components that can easily be scraped or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place any objects on the Head-up Display, attach to system compo-

nents or plug into the system. Do not move the moving parts manually.

Overview

Switching the Head-up Display on/off When switching on, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is extended. When switching off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is retracted again.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Head-Up Display"

Display

Overview The following information is displayed on the Head-up Display:

Vehicle speed.

Navigation instructions.

Check Control messages.

Selection list from the instrument clus- ter.

Driver assistance systems.

Seite 132

CONTROLS Displays

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up Display Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Displayed information"

6. Select the desired displays in the Head- up Display.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Brightness"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be additionally influenced using the instru- ment lighting, refer to page 139.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Adjusting the height Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Height"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is reached.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the rotation The screen of the Head-up Display can be rotated around its own axis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Rotation"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired set- ting is selected.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following fac- tors:

Certain sitting positions.

Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis- play.

Sunglasses with certain polarization fil- ters.

Seite 133

Displays CONTROLS

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Wet roads.

Unfavorable light conditions.

Vehicle status

General information The status can be displayed and actions per- formed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle status Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance

Symbols Description

"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the run-flat tires, refer to page 150.

"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta- tus of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 145.

"Check Control": Check Con- trol messages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the Control Display. Displaying stored Check Control messages, re- fer to page 124.

"Service required": display- ing service notifications, re- fer to page 126.

"Teleservice Call": Serv- ice Request.

Seite 134

CONTROLS Displays

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Lights

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel.

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Symbol Function

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights

General information Position of switch: , ,

If the driver's door is opened when standby state is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off.

Parking lights Position of switch:

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to switch on drive-ready state.

When parking, switch on the one-sided roadside parking light, refer to page 136.

Low beams Position of switch:

The low beams illuminate when standby state is switched on.

Seite 135

Lights CONTROLS

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Canada: roadside parking light

Concept The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resist- ance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and pathway lighting

Welcome lights

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual light functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating Position of switch: ,

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Welcome lights"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Pathway lighting

General information The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Pathway lighting"

6. Set length of time.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic headlight control

Concept The low beams are switched on and off au- tomatically depending on the ambient brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi- light or if there is precipitation.

General information A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

Activating Position of switch:

Seite 136

CONTROLS Lights

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

System limits The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judg- ment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to de- tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa- tions, switch the lights on manually.

Daytime running lights

General information Position of switch: , ,

The daytime running lights light up when standby state is switched on. After standby state is switched off, the parking lights light up in position .

Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the currently used vehicle key.

Cornering light

General information Position of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountain- ous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering an- gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig- nals.

When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on re- gardless of the steering angle.

Adaptive headlight range con- trol

The adaptive headlight range control fea- ture balances out acceleration and braking processes as well as the vehicle load condi- tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.

High-beam Assistant

Concept The high-beam Assistant detects other traf- fic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depend- ing on the traffic situation.

General information The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system.

The system responds to light from oncom- ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.

Seite 137

Lights CONTROLS

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch:

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switched between low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instru- ment cluster lights up when the sys- tem switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 109.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judg- ment of when to use the high beams. In sit- uation that require this, therefore switch off manually.

The system is not fully functional in the fol- lowing situations, and driver intervention may be necessary:

In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.

When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings.

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres- sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob- scured oncoming traffic on highways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs.

When the windshield in front of the in- terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

Concept The front fog lights work alongside the low beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.

Functional requirement The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The green indicator light lights up if the front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 136, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights.

When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Seite 138

CONTROLS Lights

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

Adjusting Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Interior lights

General information Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour- tesy lights are controlled automatically.

The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls brightness of some of these fea- tures.

Overview

1 Interior lights

2 Reading lights

3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/off Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and off manually

Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light.

Ambient light

General information Depending on the equipment version, light- ing can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Ambient lighting"

6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Changing color

Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

Press the switch forward or back- ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until the ambient light illuminates

Seite 139

Lights CONTROLS

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

several times: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness Depending on the equipment, the bright- ness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Brightness"

6. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 140

CONTROLS Lights

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide adequate protection.

Side airbag In the event of a side impact, the side air- bag protects the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Seite 141

Safety CONTROLS

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Head airbag In the event of a side impact, the head air- bag protects the head.

Ejection Mitigation The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to re- duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbag The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact.

Protective effect Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation, for instance in less severe acci- dents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of the airbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect or the de- ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protec- tion as intended and may cause additional injuries due to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in- formation on achieving the optimum pro- tective effect of the airbag system.

Keep a distance from the airbags.

Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered.

Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her

feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.

There should be no additional persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person.

Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for in- stance for GPS devices or mobile phones.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or other objects to the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not place seat cushions or other ob- jects on the front seats that are not spe- cifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

Never modify either the individual com- ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys- tem. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.

Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa- tions.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with dis- abilities may affect the air bag system; con-

Seite 142

CONTROLS Safety

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

tact MINI Customer Relations for further in- formation.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot after triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to fail- ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger- ing of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not trigger as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan- ger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap- ped by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

With the standby state switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly, indicating

the airbag system and belt tensioner are functional.

Airbag system malfunctioning Warning light does not come on when

standby state is switched on.

The warning light lights up continu- ously.

Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags

Concept The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger's side are activated or deacti- vated.

General information Before transporting a child on the front pas- senger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag function, the system must be able to de- tect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat cush- ion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front- seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac- tivated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.

Seite 143

Safety CONTROLS

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

To enable correct recognition of the occu- pied seat cushion.

Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically deter- mined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.

Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child re- straint system is to be installed on it.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags

The indicator light for the front-seat passen- ger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.

The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front pas- senger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systems The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particu- larly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi- cle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front- seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver's/ front-seat passenger airbags very much de- pends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control mes- sage is displayed. A message also appears on the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way for- ward.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. The seat moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi- tion.

Seite 144

CONTROLS Safety

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disap- pears.

If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a re- peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

General information Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and, depending on the model, the tire temperature.

Further information and instructions on us- ing the system can also be found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 227.

Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

After a tire or wheel replacement, a re- set was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.

After the tire inflation pressure was ad- justed to a new value, a reset was per- formed.

Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current status The system status can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys- tem is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Tire conditions

General information Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a SMS text message on the Control Display.

All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning re- lated to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

One to four yellow wheels A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.

Gray wheels It may not be possible to identify tire infla- tion pressure losses.

Possible causes:

Malfunction.

The system is being reset.

Additional information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures. The values shown are instantaneous meas- urements and may vary depending on driv- ing style or weather conditions.

Seite 145

Safety CONTROLS

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Resetting the system Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive off.

5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".

6. Drive away.

The wheels are displayed in gray and the following is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor".

After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving.

After successful completion of the reset, the tires appear in green on the Control Display and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures." is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes auto- matically.

Messages

General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss- ing tire inflation pressure impacts han- dling, such as steering and braking re- sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped

with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message

A symbol with a Check Control message ap- pears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla- tion pressures stored during the last reset.

Inflation was not carried out ac- cording to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.

2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Seite 146

CONTROLS Safety

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Symbol Possible cause

There is a tire inflation pressure loss.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla- tion pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moder- ately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas station, check and correct the tire infla- tion pressure in all four tires, if neces- sary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tire inflation pressure

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla- tion pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 233, are la- beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres- sure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealers service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Seite 147

Safety CONTROLS

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- ity when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driv- ing range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions,

the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

Greater likelihood of swerving off course.

Longer braking distances.

Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci- dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure loss The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstan- ces.

Seite 148

CONTROLS Safety

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Failure performing a reset The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.

Malfunction The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed.

It may not be possible to identify tire pres- sure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the fol- lowing situations:

A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a deal- ers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

Malfunction: have system checked by a dealers service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop.

The system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again.

Interference caused by systems or devi- ces with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped

with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla- tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han- dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica- tor to indicate when the system is not oper- ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi- cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a mal- function, the telltale will flash for approxi- mately one minute and then remain contin- uously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal- functions may occur for a variety of rea- sons, including the installation of replace- ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- tioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en- sure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Seite 149

Safety CONTROLS

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

Concept The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differen- ces between the individual wheels while driving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual in- flation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini- tialization was performed with the cor- rect tire inflation pressure.

After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was per- formed.

Status display The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization required An initialization must be performed in the following situations:

After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted.

After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initialization When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".

6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driv- ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Messages

General information When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss- ing tire inflation pressure impacts han- dling, such as steering and braking re- sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information

Seite 150

CONTROLS Safety

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 233, are la- beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres- sure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealers service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- ity when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Seite 151

Safety CONTROLS

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driv- ing range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

Greater likelihood of swerving off course.

Longer braking distances.

Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci- dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recog- nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recog- nized in advance.

When the system has not been initial- ized.

When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.

Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift- ing).

When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

Concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance systems.

The intelligent safety systems can help pre- vent an imminent collision.

Approach control warning with City light braking function, refer to page 153.

Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation, refer to page 157.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Seite 152

CONTROLS Safety

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judg- ment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto- matically active after every departure. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate accord- ing to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respec- tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Approach control warning with city light braking func- tion

Concept The system may prevent some accidents. In the event of an accident, the system may re- duce impact speed.

The system sounds a warning before an im- minent collision and activates brakes inde- pendently, if needed.

The Brake Assistant function activates and applies the brakes with limited force and duration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

The approach control warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

Seite 153

Safety CONTROLS

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

With the vehicle approaching another vehi- cle intentionally, the approach control warn- ing and braking are delayed in order to avoid false system reactions.

General information The system warns at two levels of an immi- nent danger of collision at speeds from ap- prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn- ings may vary with the current driving situation.

Braking is performed at speeds up to ap- proximately 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judg- ment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Seite 154

CONTROLS Safety

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after ev- ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respec- tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Intelligent Safety"

4. "Warning time"

5. Select the desired setting.

The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display A warning symbol appears in the instru- ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi- nent.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarn- ing.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.

Brake and make an evasive ma- neuver, if necessary.

Prewarning This warning is provided, for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted.

Seite 155

Safety CONTROLS

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Acute warning with braking function An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle approaching another object at a high speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to inter- vene. During a warning, the maximum brak- ing force is used. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

The systems ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

Detection range The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late.

The following situations may not be de- tected, for example:

Slow moving vehicles when you ap- proach them at high speed.

Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

Vehicles with an unusual rear appear- ance.

Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

In tight curves.

If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.

If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

Up to 10 seconds after activating the drive-ready state via the Start/Stop but- ton.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

If there are constant blinding effects be- cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed. Therefore, there may also be an excess of

Seite 156

CONTROLS Safety

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

premature or unjustified warnings and reac- tions.

Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation

Concept The system may prevent some accidents with pedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the system will issue a warning if there is imminent risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup- port this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mir- ror controls the system.

General information In sufficiently bright conditions, the system issues a warning of a possible risk of colli- sion with pedestrians in the speed range from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h

The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas:

Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.

Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo- cated within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judg- ment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Seite 157

Safety CONTROLS

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after ev- ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually

switched off according to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respec- tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Display If a collision with a detected person is im- minent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis- play.

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to inter- vene. During a warning, the maximum brak- ing force is used. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Seite 158

CONTROLS Safety

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

The systems ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

Detection range The detection potential of the camera is lim- ited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or be issued late.

The following situations may not be de- tected, for example:

Partially covered pedestrians.

Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.

Pedestrians outside of the detection range.

Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situa- tions:

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- fall.

In tight curves.

If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.

If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

Up to 10 seconds after activating the drive-ready state via the Start/Stop but- ton.

During calibration of the camera imme- diately after vehicle delivery.

If there are constant blinding effects be- cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

When it is dark outside.

Fatigue alert

Concept The system can detect decreasing alertness or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto- nous trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de- tected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the

Seite 159

Safety CONTROLS

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.

Function The system is switched on each time the en- gine is started and cannot be switched off.

After travel has begun, the system monitors certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.

This procedure takes the following criteria into account:

Personal driving style, for instance steering behavior.

Driving conditions, for instance time, length of trip.

Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a rec- ommendation to take a break.

Break recommendation If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Dis- play with the recommendation to take a break.

A recommendation to take a break is dis- played only once during an uninterrupted trip.

After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approximately 45 minutes.

System limits The function may be limited in the follow- ing situations and may issue an incorrect warning or no warning at all:

When the clock is set incorrectly.

When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h.

With a sporty driving style, such as dur- ing rapid acceleration or when corner- ing fast.

In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently.

When the road surface is poor.

In the event of strong side winds.

The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af- ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on high- ways.

PostCrash iBrake

Concept In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in cer- tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.

At standstill After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

Harder vehicle braking In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period, the braking pres- sure will be higher than the braking pres- sure that is achieved by the automatic brak- ing function. This interrupts automatic braking.

Seite 160

CONTROLS Safety

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Interrupting automatic braking It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations, for instance for an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

By pressing the brake pedal.

By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Seite 161

Safety CONTROLS

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Antilock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, which increases the active safety.

ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys- tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak- ing capability to the furthest possible ex- tent. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during an emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the capabilities pro- vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

Energy recovery

General information In the event of danger, such as with locked wheels, energy recovery is reduced in order to prevent unstable driving situations.

Safety information

Warning

Without energy recovery, there is no brak- ing power of the electric motor available. The vehicle could roll further than antici- pated. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Concept Within the physical limits, the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

General information DSC detects the following unstable driving conditions, for instance:

Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer- ing.

Loss of traction of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 163, is a version of the DSC where for- ward momentum is optimized.

Seite 162

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

When driving with a roof load, for in- stance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's center of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tip- ping in critical driving situations. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy- namic Stability Control when driving with roof load.

Indicator/warning lights The indicator light flashes: DSC con- trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General information When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, un- til the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up in the instrument cluster and dis- plays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator light go out.

Indicator/warning lights When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis- played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Automatic activation When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa- tion occurs in the following situations:

The vehicle has a flat tire.

When activating cruise control in the TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.

DTC Dynamic Traction Con- trol

Concept DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil- ity Control where forward momentum is op- timized.

The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions, for instance unp- lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.

Seite 163

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maximum traction. Driving stability is lim- ited during acceleration and when driving in curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circum- stances:

When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.

When driving off from deep snow or loose ground.

When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the in- strument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica- tor light go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used.

MINI Driving Modes switch

Concept The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.

Choose between four different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Switch Program

SPORT

MID

GREEN

GREEN+

MID MID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is acti- vated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

Concept GREEN provides consumption reducing tun- ing for increased range.

Activating GREEN Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up- ward or downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Configure the program.

Seite 164

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure GREEN"

5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

GREEN+

Concept GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi- mize range.

During the activation, some comfort func- tions will also be limited or deactivated.

Activating GREEN+ Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up- ward or downward until GREEN+ is dis- played in the instrument cluster.

SPORT

Concept Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility.

Activating SPORT Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up- ward or downward until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring driving program Settings can be made for the following driv- ing programs in Driving mode:

GREEN, refer to page 164.

SPORT, refer to page 165.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch displays a list of programs, which can be se- lected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster dis- plays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

Concept This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-off assistant 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function.

The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for in- stance, and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds.

Seite 165

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac- cording to the driving program, so that a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

Seite 166

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Cruise control

Concept Using this system, a desired speed can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.

General information The system is functional at speeds begin- ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the settings, the cruise con- trol settings many change under certain conditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

Warning

The use of the system can lead to an in- creased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance:

On winding roads.

In heavy traffic.

On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface.

There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 168.

Store speed, refer to page 168.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 168.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 169.

Increase speed, refer to page 168.

Reduce speed, refer to page 168.

Seite 167

Driving comfort CONTROLS

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as the speed limit.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

When the driver applies the brakes.

When selector lever position D is disen- gaged.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter- venes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed Press or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the cur- rent speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ 10 km/h.

or button: press button to resist- ance point and hold. The vehicle acceler- ates or decelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Seite 168

CONTROLS Driving comfort

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Continuing cruise control

General information An interrupted cruise control can be contin- ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur- rent speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Other- wise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.

Calling up the stored speed

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The stored speed is reached again and main- tained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator light

The indicator in the instru- ment cluster lights up: the sys- tem is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed

The desired speed is displayed together with the symbol.

Display lights up green: system is active, the dis- play indicates the desired speed.

Display lights up gray: system is inter- rupted, the display indicates the stored speed.

No display: system is switched off.

System limits

Engine power The desired speed is also maintained down- hill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

Concept PDC is a support when parking. The system detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve- hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob- jects that you are approaching slowly are in- dicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General information The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers.

The delete range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the fol- lowing situations:

By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.

By the rear middle sensors at ap- prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.

When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-

Seite 169

Driving comfort CONTROLS

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

cle surroundings closely and actively in- tervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis- tance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, for instance in the bump- ers.

Functional requirements Ensure full functionality:

Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers, bicycle racks or similar.

Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically in the following situations:

If selector lever position R is engaged while drive-ready state is switched on.

The rearview camera also switches on.

With front PDC: when obstacles are de- tected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than ap- prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on ob- stacle detection can be switched off. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Parking"

4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on the vehicle equipment.

5. "Automatic PDC activation"

The setting is stored for the driver pro- file currently used.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

On: the LED lights up.

Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.

Seite 170

CONTROLS Driving comfort

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Depending on the equipment version, the system cannot be switched off manually if the reverse gear is engaged.

Warning

Signal tones An intermittent tone indicates when the ve- hicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is detected to the left rear of the ve- hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals.

When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin- uous tone is sounded.

With front PDC: when objects are simulta- neously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig- nal is sounded.

Volume The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in colors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera is displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

For small children and animals.

For persons with certain clothing, for in- stance coats.

With external interference of the ultra- sound, for instance from passing vehi- cles or loud machines.

When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam- aged or out of position.

If cargo protrudes.

Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet condi- tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

Seite 171

Driving comfort CONTROLS

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

With moving objects.

With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

With objects with corners and sharp edges.

With objects with a fine surface struc- ture such as fences.

For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, for in- stance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a con- tinuous tone sounds.

False warnings The system may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:

In heavy rain.

When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice.

When sensors are covered in snow.

On rough road surfaces.

On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.

In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, for instance in under- ground garages.

In automatic vehicle washes.

Due to heavy exhaust.

Due to other ultrasound sources, for in- stance sweeping machines, high pres- sure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a contin- uous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the mal- function due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on ob- stacle detection, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switching on/off.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi- cle surroundings closely and actively in- tervene where appropriate.

Seite 172

CONTROLS Driving comfort

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically switched on if selector lever position R is engaged when the drive-ready state is switched on.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

On: the LED lights up.

Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display.

Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID) If the rearview camera view is not dis- played, change the view via the Central In- formation Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirements The rearview camera is switched on.

The tailgate is fully closed.

Keep the recording range of the camera clear.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunctions.

Activating assistance functions More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.

Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius lines are indi- cated.

Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Seite 173

Driving comfort CONTROLS

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Obstacles are marked, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneu- vering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steer- ing angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Turning radius lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road.

Only one turning radius line is displayed af- ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer- tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta- cle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark- ings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control.

Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning

radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

Seite 174

CONTROLS Driving comfort

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the cor- responding turning radius line.

Display settings

Brightness With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired set- ting is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired set- ting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob- jects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Control chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Dis- play may be closer than they appear. There-

fore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

Parking assistant

Concept

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.

General information Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps:

Switching on and activating.

Parking space search.

Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.

System status and instructions on required actions are displayed on the Control Dis- play.

A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.

Seite 175

Driving comfort CONTROLS

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the drivers personal judgment in as- sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot inde- pendently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap- propriate.

NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis- tance Control applies in addition.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring park- ing spaces are located on the wheel hous- ing.

Functional requirements

Ultrasound sensors Ensure full functionality:

Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers.

Keep the sensors clean and unob- structed.

For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward

approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

Maximum distance to row of parked ve- hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space Gaps behind an object that has a min.

length of 5 ft/1.5 m.

Gap between two objects with a mini- mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.

Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking Doors and tailgate are closed.

Seite 176

CONTROLS Driving comfort

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The parking brake is released.

When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn sig- nal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button

Press the park assistance button.

The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automati- cally.

Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not availa- ble.

White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and system status

Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park- ing assistant is activated and the park- ing space search is active.

Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.

The parking procedure is active. The system takes over the steering.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deacti- vated, the displays on the Control Dis- play are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear to switch on the parking assistant, refer to page 177. Ac- tivate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated.

2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h

Seite 177

Driving comfort CONTROLS

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are dis- played on the display, refer to page 177.

3. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the station- ary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is in- dicated on the display.

4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

Press the park assistance button.

"Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:

If the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.

If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the display.

If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.

Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces.

If a maximum number of parking at- tempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.

If the PDC Park Distance Control dis- plays clearances that are too small.

When switching into other functions of the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming An interrupted parking procedure can be continued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to page 177, and follow the instructions on the display.

Switching off The system can be switched off as follows:

Press the park assistance button.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owners Manual re- garding the scope of the systems opera- tion and limitations.

No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assis- tance in the following situations:

In tight curves.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.

On slippery ground.

With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.

Seite 178

CONTROLS Driving comfort

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

With a mounted emergency wheel.

With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

For small children and animals.

For persons with certain clothing, for in- stance coats.

With external interference of the ultra- sound, for instance from passing vehi- cles or loud machines.

When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam- aged or out of position.

If cargo protrudes.

Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet condi- tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

With moving objects.

With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

With objects with corners and sharp edges.

With objects with a fine surface struc- ture such as fences.

For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, for in- stance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a con- tinuous tone sounds.

The parking assistant may identify park- ing spaces that are not suitable for park- ing.

Tire size The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the sys- tem checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 179

Driving comfort CONTROLS

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:

Emission tested passenger compart- ment.

Microfilter.

Air conditioning system to control the temperature, air flow and recirculated- air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Automatic climate control.

Stationary climate control.

Seite 180

CONTROLS Climate control

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left

2 Display

3 Air flow, AUTO intensity

4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual

6 Display

7 Temperature, right

8 Seat heating, right 87

9 Maximum cooling

10 Air conditioning

11 Recirculated-air mode

12 Rear window defroster

13 To defrost windows and remove conden- sation

14 Seat heating, left 87

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the left until the control switches off.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if

Seite 181

Climate control CONTROLS

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

necessary by using the maximum cooling or heating power, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de- sired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to ad- just the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can be cooled with acti- vated drive-ready or standby state.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con- ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when drive-ready state is switched on.

The cooling function is switched on auto- matically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 210, de- velops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is normal.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

General information

The function is available with external tem- peratures above approx. 32 /0 and with the drive-ready state switched on.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro- gram active.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically.

The air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically depending on the temperature in the car's interior and the de- sired temperature setting including the se- lected intensity of the air flow.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the AUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side win- dows, upper body, and into the floor area.

Seite 182

CONTROLS Climate control

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Point the side vents toward the side win- dows.

The following features are switched on au- tomatically with the AUTO program:

The air conditioning, refer to page 182.

To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribu- tion.

Intensity

With the AUTO program activated, the au- tomatic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the de- sired intensity from soft to in- tensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the posi- tion of the illuminated LED segment.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- tants in the immediate environment by tem- porarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recir- culated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte- rior.

To prevent window condensation, recircu- lated-air mode switches off automatically af- ter a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recircu- lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Adjusting the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad- justed manually.

General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO program first.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de- sired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate con- trol may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Adjusting the air distribution manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Press the button repeatedly to se- lect a program:

Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

Upper body region and floor area.

Seite 183

Climate control CONTROLS

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Floor area.

Windows and floor area.

Windows.

Windows and upper body region.

Upper body region.

To defrost windows and remove condensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side win- dows.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro- gram active.

If there is window condensation, switch on the air conditioning too.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat- ing output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 248.

Ventilation

Setting The air flow directions can be individually adjusted:

Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools no- ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem- perature.

Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is directly routed into the car's inte- rior.

Front ventilation

Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the vents.

Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrows.

Stationary climate control

Concept Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's interior prior to departure to a com- fortable temperature.

The system automatically cools, vents, or heats depending on the internal and exter- nal temperature. Snow and ice may be re- moved more easily.

Seite 184

CONTROLS Climate control

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

General information The stationary climate control can be switched on and off directly or via a preset departure time:

Direct operation, refer to page 185.

Preselected departure times, refer to page 185.

The air automatically exits through the vents to the windshield, the side windows, the upper body region and into the floor area.

The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

If stationary climate control is used during the charging process, less air conditioning capacity will be required while driving. This optimizes the range.

Functional requirements Drive-ready state deactivated.

High-voltage battery sufficiently charged or charging cable connected.

If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis- charged, it can take some time after con- necting the charging cable, until the sta- tionary climate control will be functional.

Direct operation or departure time pre- selected: depends on internal, external, and set desired temperature.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

To ensure the minimum range of the ve- hicle, the stationary climate control may be automatically switched off, for in- stance after repeated activation or due to an insufficient state of charge of the high-voltage battery. After the station- ary climate control is switched off due to an insufficient state of charge, charge the high-voltage battery and switch the

drive-ready state on and off. The station- ary climate control is available again.

The vents are open to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

Concept The system can be switched on or off di- rectly.

The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID) The system can be switched on or off via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort climate"

5. "Activate now"

Climate control for departure time

Concept Different departure times can be set to en- sure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at the time of departure.

The activation time is automatically deter- mined based on the temperature.

The system promptly switches on before the selected departure time.

The departure time is preselected in two steps:

Set departure times.

Activate departure times.

Seite 185

Climate control CONTROLS

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Setting the departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort climate"

5. "Plan comfort climate"

6. Set the desired departure time, refer to page 225.

Activating the departure time If a departure time is to influence the switching on of the stationary climate con- trol, the respective departure time must be activated first.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort climate"

5. "Plan comfort climate"

6. "Precondition for departure"

7. Activate the desired departure time.

The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the departure time is activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the stationary climate control has been switched on.

Seite 186

CONTROLS Climate control

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Integrated Universal Remote Control

Concept The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func- tions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys- tems.

General information The Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans- mitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be pro- grammed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular sys- tem is required in order to program the re- mote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys- tems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may re- sult in injury, for example, body parts be- coming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the pack- aging or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled, the system

is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control.

Additional questions are answered by:

A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen- tex Corporation.

Seite 187

Interior equipment CONTROLS

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Overview

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of pro- gramming to ensure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control.

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro- gramming of the buttons on the interior mirror.

3. Press the interior mirror button to be programmed. The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and re- peatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED lights up green: program- ming completed.

Release the button.

The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir- ror for 2 seconds and release. Per- form this procedure three times to complete the programming proce- dure.

If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, con- tinue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not com- pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other but- tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling code wireless system If you are unable to operate the system af- ter repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a roll- ing code radio system.

Refer to the owner's manual for the system.

For systems with a rolling code radio sys- tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con- trol and the system also have to be synchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find out how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.

Seite 188

CONTROLS Interior equipment

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re- mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the inte- rior mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing but- ton on the system being programmed, e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If neces- sary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the pro- grammed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press and hold the interior mirror but- ton to be programmed.

3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir- ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec- onds, release the button.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and re- peatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED can light up in different ways.

The LED lights up green: the pro- gramming procedure is completed.

Release the button.

The LED flashes fast: the hand-held transmitter was detected but pro- gramming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir- ror for 2 seconds and release. Per- form this procedure three times to complete the programming proce- dure.

If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, con- tinue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not com- pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

If the programming procedure is not com- pleted, the previous programming will re- main unchanged.

Operation

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys- tems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may re- sult in injury, for example, body parts be- coming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire- less signal is being transmitted.

Seite 189

Interior equipment CONTROLS

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Deleting stored functions All stored functions will be deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi- mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in- terior mirror flashes green rapidly.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Control button

2 Mirror display

Mirror display The compass shows the current driving di- rection.

Operating concept Various functions can be called up by press- ing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed:

Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.

3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.

6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.

9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting.

12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the ve- hicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.

Seite 190

CONTROLS Interior equipment

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press the control button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corresponds with your location ap- pears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approx- imately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:

The wrong compass point is displayed.

The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direc- tion of travel.

Not all points of the compass are dis- played.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal-

lic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.

3. Press and hold the control button for ap- prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc- cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language Press and hold the control button for ap- prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

Seite 191

Interior equipment CONTROLS

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after ap- proximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shield To provide protection against glare, fold the sun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror light- ing switches on.

Front passenger side dash- board

Decorative trim

Customized decorative trim panels for the dashboard on the front passenger side are available as original MINI accessories de- pending on the equipment specification.

Follow the assembly instructions.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.

Ashtray In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

Warning

Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ig- nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage to property. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil- dren do not use the cigarette lighter.

Seite 192

CONTROLS Interior equipment

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Sockets

Concept The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment when standby and drive-ready state are switched on.

General information The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using non- compatible connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's in- terior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Seite 193

Interior equipment CONTROLS

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.

USB port

General information Follow the information regarding the con- nection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections, refer to page 55.

In the center console

Depending on the equipment version, a USB port Type A or a USB port Type A and a USB port Type C are located in the front of the center console.

Properties of upper USB port:

USB port Type A.

For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.

Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

Properties of lower USB port:

USB port Type C.

For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.

Charge current: max. 3 A.

Wireless charging tray

Concept The wireless charging tray enables the fol- lowing functions to be performed without cables:

Charging the rechargeable battery of a mobile phone with Qi capability and of other mobile devices, which support the Qi standard.

Connect the mobile phone to the exter- nal antenna.

Depending on the country, this provides for better network reception and a con- sistent reproduction quality.

General information When inserting the mobile phone, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging tray.

During charging, the surface of the tray and the mobile phone may become warm. Higher temperatures may lead to a reduc- tion in the charge current through the mo- bile phone, and in isolated cases the charg- ing process is paused temporarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the mobile phone owner's manual.

NOTE This device has been tested for human ex- posure limits and found compliant at a mini- mum distance of 4 in/10 cm during opera- tion.

Seite 194

CONTROLS Interior equipment

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be maintained in every direction when operat- ing the device.

Mounting position of the product.

Safety information

Warning

When charging a device that meets the Qi standard in the wireless charging tray, any metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal transmission, between the device and the tray may impair the card function. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. When charg- ing mobile devices, make sure there are no objects between the device and the tray.

NOTICE

The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile phone into the tray can damage the tray or the mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to property. Observe the maximum dimensions for mobile phones. Do not force the mobile phone into the tray.

Functional requirements Ignition or standby state is switched on.

The mobile phone must compatibly sup- port the required Qi standard. Compati- ble mobile phones, refer to page 53.

If the mobile phone does not support the Qi standard, the mobile phone can be charged using a special Qi-compatible charging case.

Use only protective jackets and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging function may be impaired.

The mobile phone must not exceed the maximum size of approximately 5.9 x 3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.

Overview The wireless charging tray is located in the center armrest.

1 Front holder with LED

2 Storage area

3 Movable clamp

Inserting the mobile phone 1. Open center armrest, refer to vehicle

Owner's Manual.

2. Push back the clamp.

Seite 195

Interior equipment CONTROLS

195 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

3. Insert the mobile phone with the display facing upward in the direction of the front holder, arrow 1.

4. Place the mobile phone in the storage area, arrow 2.

5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the mobile phone in the tray.

6. Close the center armrest.

Removing the mobile phone 1. Open the center armrest.

2. Push the clamp back and remove the mobile phone.

LED displays

Color Meaning

Blue The mobile phone is charging.

Depending on the model, the blue LED is no longer illuminated once the inserted mobile phone with Qi capability is fully charged.

Or- ange

The mobile phone is not charg- ing.

Temperature on the mobile phone possibly too high or for- eign object in the charging tray.

Red The mobile phone is not charg- ing.

Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

System limits At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer work.

LTE-Compensator - Information and User Manual Your car is equipped with a wireless charg- ing tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and connect it to the mobile network. To en- sure the best possible connection a signal booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in con- junction with the WCA. The following para- graphs refer to this booster:

This is a CONSUMER device.

BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DEVICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers consent to the use of Compensa- tors. Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you

Seite 196

CONTROLS Interior equipment

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

are unsure, contact your provider. You MUST operate this device with approved an- tennas and cables as specified by the manu- facturer. Antennas MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You MUST cease operating this device immedi- ately if requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider. Warning E911 lo- cation information may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device.

Please observe additionally the following in- formation

Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register their signal boosters by calling their toll-free number.

T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistra- tion); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/ SignalBooster#).

Verizons online registration link: (http://www.verizonwireless.com/ wcms/consumer/register-signal-boos- ter.html).

AT&T online registration link (https:// securec45.securewebsession.com/ attsignalbooster.com/).

U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/ support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).

Before use you must register your booster device with your wireless provider.

If you should be requested by the FCC to cease operating your booster, you are not allowed to insert your mobile phone in the charging tray anymore unless the booster is permanently deactivated by your local MINI dealer.

You must not remove the booster from the car nor use it with any other than the prein- stalled coupling device or antenna. Any modification of the existing antenna or cou- pling device as well as the use of other an-

tennas or coupling devices will cause the cease of the boosters operating license.

The booster device fulfills the network pro- tection standards as required by the FCC, such as intermodulation limits, oscillation detection and gain limits.

Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive

Model Number: LTECOMPB0

Part Number: 6803145-01

FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0

Seite 197

Interior equipment CONTROLS

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's in- terior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are available in the car's interior:

Glove compartment on the front passen- ger side.

Compartments in the doors.

Storage compartment in the center arm- rest.

Storage compartment in front of the cup holders.

Clothes hooks

Storage tray in the center console.

Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Warning

Folded open, the glove compartment pro- trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or eva- sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment im- mediately after using it.

Seite 198

CONTROLS Storage compartments

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing Fold up the cover.

Compartments in the doors

General information There are storage compartments in the doors.

Safety information

Warning

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an acci- dent or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any break- able objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage com- partments.

Center armrest

General information The center armrest contains a storage com- partment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm- rest upward, arrow 2.

Adjusting the height

Press button, arrow 1, and swing center armrest upward or downward into the de- sired height, arrow 2.

Seite 199

Storage compartments CONTROLS

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Cup holders

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the cars interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the traffic conditions and lead to an acci- dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot bever- ages.

Front

In the center console.

Rear

In front of the back seats and in the side armrests.

Clothes hooks

General information The clothes hooks are located above the side windows in the rear.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending cloth- ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

Warning

Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop- erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in- stance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.

Seite 200

CONTROLS Storage compartments

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Loading

Safety information

Warning

High gross weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sud- den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics may be negatively im- pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen- ing the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight.

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's in- terior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for in- stance in the event of an accident or dur- ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi- cle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicles placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca- pacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi- cle, the amount of available cargo and

Seite 201

Cargo area CONTROLS

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug- gage and cargo being loaded on the ve- hicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load ca- pacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the availa- ble cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.

Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos- sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.

Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

If necessary, fold down the rear back- rests to stow large cargo.

Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet straps or draw straps.

Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

Without storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, arrow 1, in the cargo area.

With storage compartment package: to se- cure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, ar- rows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Cargo cover

General information When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised.

Seite 202

CONTROLS Cargo area

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's in- terior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable con- nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Removing For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right.

Installing 1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-

tally into the two side brackets until it audibly engages.

2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

Storage space under cargo floor panel

Located under the cargo floor panel on the right side is a trough for the onboard vehi- cle tool kit.

Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Enlarging the cargo area

Concept The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:

The rear seat backrests can be folded down.

The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position using the cargo setting.

General information The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat backrest is connected to the center section.

The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear.

Seite 203

Cargo area CONTROLS

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Danger of jamming with folding down the backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse- cured cargo can be thrown about the cars interior; for instance, in the event of an ac- cident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after fold- ing it back.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re- straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear 1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded

down, hook the corresponding safety belt into the belt buckle on the side.

2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the rear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.

Cargo position

Concept The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position.

Adjusting 1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.

2. Fold the frame up until it engages.

3. Fold back and engage the rear seat backrest.

Folding back the backrest Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not

Seite 204

CONTROLS Cargo area

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

caught behind the backrest or in between the backrest and the rear seats.

The red marking on the lever disappears completely.

Variable cargo area floor

Concept With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to transport requirements.

General information Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 201.

Removing the cargo floor panel

Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward from the supports.

The cargo floor panel can be removed from the cargo area above the tail lights.

Lower position

Larger objects can be transported.

Space for smaller objects remains be- tween the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Folded up position

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the variable cargo floor panel can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneu- vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property.

Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to separate the cargo area and car's interior in the sense of a parti- tion net.

Only use the variable cargo floor panel in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked.

Fold down the variable cargo floor panel before driving off.

Always secure cargo against shifting, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for instance.

Seite 205

Cargo area CONTROLS

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Fold up the cargo floor panel

Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower position and push it behind the locks, arrow.

You've reached the maximum cargo height.

Upper position

With the backrests folded down, a long, flat loading surface is produced.

Maximum load in this position: 330 lbs/150 kg.

Space for objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Seite 206

CONTROLS Cargo area

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Seite 207

Cargo area CONTROLS

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Breaking-in period

General information Moving parts need to begin working to- gether smoothly.

The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good effi- ciency.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and inter- vene early if necessary. Observe the break- in procedures of the respective parts and components.

Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- turing circumstances when tires are brand-

new; they achieve their full traction poten- tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after ap- prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be ob- served if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

Warning

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi- cle and can endanger occupants and other traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or eva- sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.

Driving with the tailgate open If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided:

Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

Seite 208

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.

Drive moderately.

Ice on window glass

NOTICE

The window will be lowered slightly when pulling on the door handle. In the event of frost, the window may freeze up and not be lowered. There is a risk of damage to property. When pulling on the door han- dle, make sure that the window is lowered. If necessary, remove snow and ice from the window. Do not open the door with force.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mo- bile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior an- tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer- ence and deflect the radiation from the car's interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road sur- face.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydro- planing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermin-

ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi- cle.

Driving through water

General information When driving through water, follow the fol- lowing:

Drive through calm water only.

Drive through water only if it is not deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.

Drive through water no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through too deep water, water can enter into the en- gine compartment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated wa- ter level and the maximum speed for driv- ing through water.

Braking safely

General information The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System ABS as a standard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situations that require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Seite 209

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Objects in the area around the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob- jects in the vehicle such that they are se- cured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re- moved, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every few miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic.

The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be avail- able when you need it.

Hills

General information

The braking effect of the drive system can be influenced through the energy recovery.

Safety information

Warning

Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces- sive stress on the brake system.

Warning

In idle state or with drive-ready state switched off, safety-relevant functions, for instance drive system braking effect, brak- ing force boost and steering assistance, are restricted or not available at all. There is a risk of accident. Do not drive in idle state or with drive-ready state switched off.

Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contami- nation on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances:

Low mileage.

Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.

Infrequent use of the brakes.

Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - generally this cannot be corrected.

Condensation water under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops and collects underneath the vehicle.

Seite 210

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g., curbs or underground garage entrances, contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, and the underbody may occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance availa- ble.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General information Installation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accesso- ries.

Mounting Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Loading Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

Be sure that adequate clearance is main- tained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.

Distribute the roof load uniformly.

The roof load should not extend past the loading area.

Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.

Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in- stance using ratchet straps.

Do not let objects project into the open- ing path of the tailgate.

Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac- celeration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Driving on racetracks

Warning

The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motor sport type competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type competitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This wear is not covered by the warranty.

Seite 211

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Increasing range

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The vehicle contains comprehensive tech- nologies for reducing energy consumption and for maximizing the range.

The range depends on a number of different factors, refer to page 125.

The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can increasing the range and thereby also re- duce the environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight reduces the range.

Remove attached parts follow- ing use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear luggage racks which are no longer re- quired following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the energy con- sumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and thereby reduces the range.

Tires

General information Tires can affect energy consumption in vari- ous ways, for instance energy consumption can be influenced by tire size.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla- tion pressure at least twice a month and be- fore starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises energy consump- tion and tire wear.

Stationary climate control

Run advance climate control, refer to page 184, in the vehicle during charging be- fore driving off.

Heating and cooling operations are very en- ergy intensive and substantially reduce the electric range.

Seite 212

DRIVING TIPS Increasing range

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces energy consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak- ing.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

Longer braking procedures result in more efficient charging of the high-voltage bat- tery via energy recovery from braking.

Use accelerator pedal for de- celeration and coasting

When approaching a red light, use accelera- tor pedal for decelerating.

For going downhill use coasting function; for this purpose, press accelerator pedal just enough that the vehicle rolls.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are not needed.

The GREEN and GREEN+ driving modes support the energy-conserving use of com- fort features. They automatically perform a partial or complete deactivation of these functions.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv- ice life. MINI recommends that mainte- nance work be performed by a MINI service center.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer to page 248.

Using eDRIVE efficiently

Concept eDRIVE operates automatically. Proactive driving utilizes energy consumption and en- ergy recovery optimally. Energy recovery is used to charge the high-voltage battery. En- ergy recovery is important for the supply of electrical components and thus a prerequi- site for a long range. Energy consumption and recovery depend very much, among other things, on your driving style.

Optimizing driving style

Performance display Your driving style can be optimized using the performance display.

The energy recovery occurs during coasting and braking and is displayed in the perform- ance display by the accelerator pedal indica- tor.

Seite 213

Increasing range DRIVING TIPS

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

The accelerator pedal indicator is within the CHARGE range.

Efficient energy recovery:

The accelerator pedal moves in the yel- low range of the CHARGE display, ar- row 1.

The energy use while driving can be op- timized by efficient acceleration.

Set high energy recovery, refer to page 106, to recover as much energy as possible.

Efficient acceleration:

The accelerator pedal moves in the yel- low range of the ePOWER display, ar- row 2.

Use deceleration by coasting as often as possible for energy recovery.

Discharge of the high-voltage battery

General information Longer idle periods, refer to page 266, can reduce the charge state of the high-voltage battery.

Safety information

NOTICE

The high-voltage battery can be damaged if left uncharged or with low charge for ex- tended periods. There is a risk of damage to property. Before storing the vehicle for an extended period, ensure that the high- voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle period, connect the vehicle to a charg- ing station at a compatible charging loca- tion. If necessary, the high-voltage battery will be charged automatically. Make sure that charging is carried out. Regularly check the charge state.

Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for lon- ger than four weeks with a charge state below approx. 80 %.

GREEN Mode

Concept GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, for in- stance the climate control output, are ad- justed.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style.

General information The system includes the following MINI- MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis- plays:

GREEN Limit, refer to page 215

GREEN climate control, refer to page 215.

GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to page 215.

MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 216.

Activating GREEN Mode Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the in- strument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. Activating GREEN Mode.

2. "Configure GREEN"

Seite 214

DRIVING TIPS Increasing range

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

3. Select the desired setting.

Via the Central Information Display (CID) 1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Configure GREEN"

4. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating the functions The following functions can be activated/ deactivated:

"GREEN speed warning"

"GREEN climate control"

"Coasting"

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

GREEN Limit "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit

is activated.

A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

"Tip at:"

Set the desired speed for the GREEN Limit.

When GREEN+ is activated, the GREEN Limit is set to 55 mph/90 km/h.

GREEN climate control Climate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tem- perature and adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior consumption can be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and ex- terior mirror is reduced.

GREEN potential savings Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN tip, driving instruction

General information

The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient, for example by backing off the accelerator.

Activating/deactivating the display Activate information relating to the driving style and GREEN tips in the instrument cluster using the Central Information Dis- play (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "GREEN info"

GREEN tip, symbols An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed.

Symbol Measure

For an efficient driving style, look well ahead when driving, accelerate conservatively, and delay accelerating.

Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.

Seite 215

Increasing range DRIVING TIPS

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Indications on the Control Display

Displaying MINIMALISM information The current efficiency of the functions in GREEN Mode can be displayed on the Con- trol Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "MINIMALISM"

Information is shown on the following func- tions:

Auto Start/Stop function.

Energy recovery.

MINIMALISM analyzer

Concept In this situation, the function helps develop an especially efficient driving style and to save energy.

For this purpose, the driving style is ana- lyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display.

This display will help you adjust your driv- ing style and save some energy.

Functional requirement This function is available in GREEN Mode.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Display on the Control Display The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer consists of a fish in a water glass and a value table.

The fish and the movements of the water in the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the driving style.

Depending on the equipment, the fish is shown with efficient and inefficient driving style or only with inefficient driving style.

The more efficient the driving style, the less the water sloshes around in the bowl and the better is the fish's mood. If the driving style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number of stars is displayed.

The table of values contains stars and evalu- ates the driving style in different catego- ries. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are displayed in the table.

To assist with an efficient driving style, GREEN tips are displayed while driving.

Tips for an energy-saving driving style, In- creasing the range, refer to page 212.

Seite 216

DRIVING TIPS Increasing range

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Seite 217

Increasing range DRIVING TIPS

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Charging the vehicle

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

The vehicle can be charged using various charging cables at charging stations or household sockets. Control and monitoring of the charging process are handled com- pletely automatically. The charge current strength can be set via the Central Informa- tion Display (CID).

General information

High-voltage battery The high-voltage battery is used as an en- ergy accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be charged by energy recovery during the trip or via the power grid.

In order to operate the high-voltage battery optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and fully using a compatible charger.

When charging via the power grid, you can chose between the following variants.

Level 1 charging via a household socket.

Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging station.

Charging via a DC charging station.

Level 1 charging is possible via a household socket with a voltage of 120 volts.

For optimal use of the energy from the power mains, charging at a charging sta- tion, for instance BMW Wallbox, is recom- mended.

Charge current

General information The charge current strength is indicated in amperes.

The vehicle cannot automatically detect the maximum permissible charge current strength of the power grid during charging via a household socket or charging station.

Level 1 charging Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own household socket, or at other house- hold sockets, the permitted charge current strength must be determined by a qualified electrician, for example.

The charge current strength for Level 1 charging, refer to page 224, can be adjusted in the vehicle in three levels.

At delivery, the charge current for Level 1 charging is set to the lowest level.

Depending on the country-specific version, one of several ampere ratings is printed on the Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rat- ing is the limit which must be adhered to for the vehicle if the charge current is set to the highest level. Depending on the charg- ing cable, the charge current strength may vary when lower levels are set.

Seite 218

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Overview

Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting

"Max." "Reduced" "Low"

6 A 6 A 6 A 6 A

8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A

10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A

12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A

15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A

Depending on the charge current setting, the charging duration changes.

Safety information

Warning

Improper working with electrical current can lead to an electric shock due to high voltages or high currents. There is a risk of fire or danger to life. Observe the gen- eral safety regulations when working with electrical current.

Warning

A faulty and incorrectly designed charging device at the charging location can cause damage to the vehicle and overload the power mains at the charging location. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that, prior to your first use of a charging location, you have the compati- bility of the following components con- firmed:

Charging cable.

Charging station.

Household socket and connected cir- cuits.

Warning

Damaged or worn charging devices, for in- stance worn contacts, can heat up. There is a risk of fire. Only use charging devices that are in good condition.

Warning

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. High voltage is present at the charging connection. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that work on the charging connec- tion, for instance cleaning, be performed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Charging cable

General information Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charg- ing cable or the permanently installed charging cable of a charging station to charge the vehicle.

Seite 219

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Different charging cables can be required depending on the country.

Safety information

Warning

Non-compatible charging cables or unsuit- able charging stations can heat up and cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire. Use charging cables or charg- ing stations for charging that are suitable for the respective vehicle type.

A dealer's service center will be glad to provide information about suitable charg- ing cables.

Warning

Improper use of the charging cable can prevent charging and lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca- bles or adapters.

Warning

Damaged charging cables can heat up or lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Use undamaged charging cables only.

Level 1 charging cable The vehicle is supplied with a Level 1 charging cable.

Level 1 charging cables can be used to charge the vehicle from grounded house- hold sockets. Charging at household socket connections is performed with alternating current.

When a Level 1 charging cable is used, the efficiency values may differ from those stated on the energy label.

Level 2 charging cable The Level 2 charging cable makes it possi- ble to quickly recharge at sockets of desig- nated Level 2 charging stations using a spe- cial plug. Charging is performed with alternating current at designated Level 2 charging stations. The charging process can be completed faster than at household sockets.

A charge current strength of up to maxi- mum 16 A is possible.

The charging cable may be permanently in- stalled at the charging station.

DC charging cable The DC charging cable that is permanently installed at the charging station makes is possible to charge at DC charging stations. Charging is performed with direct current at designated DC charging stations. At the higher capacity current connection of a DC charger station the charging time is signifi- cantly lower than with a household socket or a Level 2 charging station.

During charging at a DC charging station, an indication in the instrument cluster, re- fer to page 225, is displayed.

The DC charging cable is also referred to as Level 3 DC charging cable.

Seite 220

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Storage

The Level 1 charging cable is located in a bag in the cargo area.

Store charging cable again in the bag after use. Attach the bag to the designated eyelet.

If required, store the charging cable with the installed plug cover to prevent moisture in the charging cable plug.

Connecting

Charging socket flap

The charging socket flap is located on the right side of the vehicle.

Always keep charging socket clean and un- obstructed.

Keep the charging socket flap closed when the charging socket is not used.

Connecting the charging cable To connect, engage selector lever posi- tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-

lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed.

1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow. The charging socket flap opens.

2. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.

3. Remove the cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.

5. Insert the appropriate charging cable plug, and push it in until it engages.

When charging at a charging station, follow the instructions at the charging station.

Removing When the charging process is active and the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is automatically locked. Unlock the vehicle be- fore removing the cable.

When the charging process is completed, the charging cable is automatically un- locked.

Seite 221

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

If necessary, clean the area between the charging socket flap and charging socket, for instance from snow, before removing it.

1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key if it is locked.

Charging cable is unlocked.

2. Press the release button on the handle, arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at the gripping areas.

Charging process is interrupted.

3. Remove the charging cable from the charging socket, arrow 2.

4. Put the charging socket lid back on.

5. Press on the charging socket flap until it engages.

6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the household socket or Level 2 charg- ing cable from the port on the charging station as applicable.

8. Stow the charging cable.

At a charging station, insert the perma- nently installed charging cable in the place provided for it.

Electrical unlocking of the charging cable

Concept In the following situations, the charging ca- ble can be unlocked and removed electroni- cally:

When the vehicle is locked.

When a charging station is defective.

Unlocking Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Settings charging current"

4. "Unlock charging cable"

Charging process

General information At high temperatures, the high-voltage bat- tery is initially cooled. There may be a delay before charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is discharged, cooling of the high- voltage battery may not be possible. The charging process cannot be started.

If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed to high temperatures and direct sunlight, this may interrupt the charging process. Charg- ing will resume automatically.

The charging process may take longer under extremely low or high temperatures.

Seite 222

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the power mains connec- tion can lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Use the charging ca- ble only for charging the vehicle, and do not extend it using cables or adapters.

Warning

If the charge current strength is adjusted incorrectly, the power mains of the house- hold socket can be overloaded and over- heat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current strength to the power mains prior to charging on household sockets. With unknown power networks, set on the lowest level.

Starting the charging process 1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the

parking brake, if needed.

2. For planning the charging process, refer to page 224.

3. Switch off drive-ready state.

4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.

5. Open the charging socket flap.

6. Connect the charging cable to the vehi- cle, refer to page 221.

7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.

Charging status display

Indicator light at the charging socket

An indicator light is located on the charging socket.

Charging status

Light Charging status

White Charging cable can be con- nected or removed.

Flashes or- ange

Charging process is being prepared.

Yellow Charging process paused.

Flashes yel- low

Charging process is active.

Flashes red rapidly

Fault in the charging proc- ess.

Green Charging process is com- pleted.

When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light goes out after some time.

When the vehicle is unlocked, the yellow indicator light flashes continuously. The other indicator lights go out after some time.

Press the button on the vehicle key to check the charging state. The charging sta- tus is indicated on the indicator light. In some cases the vehicle is locked.

Seite 223

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Additional messages about the charging sta- tus, for instance the probable end of charg- ing or the planned departure time, can be shown in the instrument cluster or on the Control Display.

Planning the charging process

General information The charging process can be adapted to constraints, for instance the cost of electric- ity. The vehicle controls the charging proc- ess in such a way that the charging process is completed if possible at the departure time. A departure time must be set for this purpose, refer to page 225.

The following settings are available:

Immediate charging.

Set time window for favorable charging.

Set the charge current for charging via a Level 1 charging cable.

If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via the Central Information Display (CID). Settings for the stationary cli- mate control and charging process are also accepted for planned departure times.

Setting the charging mode Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. Select the desired setting:

"Charge immediately": the charging process starts as soon as the charg- ing cable is connected.

"Charge for departure time": if a de- parture time is set, a time window for charging with a favorable elec- tricity rate can be set.

Setting the time window for favorable- rate Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Set low cost time slot"

4. Set rate begin.

5. Set rate end.

The vehicle can also start the charging proc- ess before the selected time window begins or end it after the selected time window fin- ishes. The starting point of the charging process is adjusted so the vehicle can be as fully charged as possible and, if applicable, its climate adjusted by the departure time.

Setting the charge current for charging via a Level 1 charging cable Depending on the electrical mains, the vehi- cle must be charged with a different charge current strength, refer to page 218.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Settings charging current"

4. "Level 1 (120V)"

Settings are stored. When you change charging locations you also might need to change the setting for charging.

Set the charge current strength at other household sockets to the lowest level.

Stopping the charging process The charging process can be stopped at any time by removing the charging cable and continued at a later time by connecting the charging cable. This enables, for instance the use of other loads on the power connec- tion or prevents simultaneous high power from multiple loads.

Seite 224

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

For removing the charging cable, refer to page 221.

Continuing the charging process If the charging process is interrupted, for instance through a temporary power failure, the charging process is automatically con- tinued after the interruption.

Terminating the charging process 1. Remove the charging cable from the ve-

hicle, refer to page 221.

2. Stow the charging cable as required.

3. Close the charging socket flap.

4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The charge state indicator light, refer to page 120, shows the charge state of the high-voltage battery in the instrument clus- ter, if the standby state or drive-ready state is switched on. If all bars are filled, the high-voltage battery is fully charged.

Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage system is still under high voltage.

Information regarding the charging process is shown on the charging screen.

Display Meaning

Ring orange: the charging proc- ess is being prepared.

Ring yellow animated: the charging process is active or it will start at the set time.

Ring yellow: the charging proc- ess pauses.

Ring red: fault in the charging process.

Ring green: the charging proc- ess is completed.

End of charging time or set de- parture time.

DC charging active on a DC charging station.

Departure time set.

Climate control activated at de- parture time.

Flashing: ventilation active.

Flashing: heating active.

Flashing: cooling active.

Departure time

Concept For optimum range and climate control, the departure time can be set before parking the vehicle.

Seite 225

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

General information With a set departure time, the vehicle is preheated or precooled during the charging process if climate control is set. Climate control output is reduced during the trip. This increases the range during electric driving.

The following settings are possible for de- parture time:

Climate control for departure time.

Planning of up to two regular departure times.

If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via the Central Information Display (CID). Settings for climate control and charging process are also applied for scheduled departure times.

Climate control for departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Precondition for departure"

Setting the departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Set departure time"

4. Set the desired days of the week, if needed.

5. Set the desired time.

Up to three departure times can be set.

Activating the departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Set departure time"

Set departure times are displayed.

4. For example activate "Departure time 1".

Up to two departure times can be activated.

The set departure time will be deactivated, if the departure time was ignored three times in a row.

Climate control

The following settings for vehicle air condi- tioning are possible:

Activate stationary climate control im- mediately, refer to page 184.

The range is reduced if stationary cli- mate control is activated without a charging cable connected.

Planned climate control at the set depar- ture time, refer to page 185.

If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the high-voltage battery may not be fully charged at departure time.

Discharged high-voltage and vehicle battery

General information In addition to the high-voltage battery, the vehicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is required for operation of the onboard electronics.

With a discharged vehicle battery, no oper- ation of the vehicle is possible.

Seite 226

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Tire inflation pressure

General information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following:

The service life of the tires.

Road safety.

Driving comfort.

Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and be- fore a long trip.

Tire inflation pressure specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 228, contains all tire inflation pres- sure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pres- sure, please note the following:

Tire sizes of your vehicle.

Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla- tion pressure increases with the tire tem- perature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire inflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under- read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same tempera- ture as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.:

Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.

Seite 227

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip.

1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.

2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex- ample.

3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the intended tire inflation pres- sure.

4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.

For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Tire pressures To achieve optimum driving comfort, note the tire inflation pressure specifications in the Tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 228, and adjust as needed.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driv- er's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/ 160 km/h.

Tire pressure values

COOPER SE

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

195/55 R 16 87 W

195/55 R 16 87 H M+S

2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32

205/45 R 17 88 V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88 W XL

205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S

2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35

175/60 R 16 86 H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86 H XL M+S

2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38

Tire identification marks

Tire size 205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Seite 228

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Maximum tire load Maximum tire load is the maximum permis- sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR on the certification label on the drivers door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicles Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation Maximum speed

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h

S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0120

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

0120: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Manufacture date You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT 0120 1st week 2020

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applica- ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera- ture A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the ac- tual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service prac- tices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under

Seite 229

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

controlled conditions on specified govern- ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction per- formance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera- ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform- ance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning

The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un- derinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 233, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the let- ters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread

Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in- creased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re- quired minimum height of 0.063 in- ches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Seite 230

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Tire damage

General information Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for- eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfa- ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta- cles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz- ards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions:

Unusual vibrations.

Unusual tire or running noises.

Unusual handling such as a strong ten- dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following sit- uations, for instance:

Driving over curbs.

Road damage.

Tire inflation pressure too low.

Vehicle overloading.

Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres- sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con- trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam- age is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this pur- pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealers service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

Tires can become damaged by driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. If possible, avoid driving over objects or road conditions that may damage tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc- ing carried out by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Light-alloy rim MINI Electric Corona Spoke 2 Tone

A balancing weight is required for wheel balancing.

The balancing weight is available as a spe- cial tool from a dealers service center, an-

Seite 231

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Have wheel balancing executed exclusively by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General information You can ask the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combina- tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for instance due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your ve- hicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type.

Warning

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak- ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con- trol. There is a risk of accident. To main- tain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configu- ration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manu- facturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire

combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- turing circumstances when tires are brand- new; they achieve their full traction poten- tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreaded tires can have different tire cas- ing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of re- treaded tires.

The manufacturer of the vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Seite 232

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operat- ing on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro- vide better winter traction than summer tires, they usually do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tires For your own safety, use only runflat tires. Further information is available from a deal- er's service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs between the axles to achieve even wear. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.

Storing tires

Tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

Concept Run-flat tires permit continued driving un- der restricted conditions even in the event of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General information The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driv- ing with a flat tire.

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- ity when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Seite 233

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Label

The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

Switch on the hazard warning system.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.

Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead posi- tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out- side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

Concept With the Mobility System, minor tire dam- age can be sealed temporarily to enable con- tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the dam- age from the inside.

General information Follow the instructions on using the

Mobility System found on the compres- sor and sealant container.

Use of the Mobility System may be inef- fective if the tire puncture measures ap- prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.

Contact a dealer's service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.

Do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire.

Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal- ant container and apply it to the steer- ing wheel.

The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM wheel electronics re- placed at the next opportunity.

The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Overview

Storage The Mobility System is in a bag on the right side of the cargo area.

Sealant container

Sealant container, arrow 1.

Filling hose, arrow 2.

Seite 234

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Observe use-by date on the sealant con- tainer.

Compressor

1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Sealant container holder

3 Tire pressure gage

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button

5 On/off switch

6 Compressor

7 Connector/cable for socket

8 Connection hose

Safety measures Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

Switch on the hazard warning system.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.

Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead posi- tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out- side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during ex- tended operation. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Do not run the compres- sor for more than 10 minutes.

Filling 1. Shake the sealant container.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.

Seite 235

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, en- suring that it engages audibly.

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con- tainer onto the tire valve of the non- working wheel.

5. With the compressor switched off, in- sert the plug into the power socket in- side the vehicle.

6. With standby state or drive-ready state switched on, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure

Checking 1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage.

To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres- sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant container 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant

container from the tire valve.

2. Press the red unlocking device.

3. Remove the sealant container from the compressor.

4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

Seite 236

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached 1. Pull the connector out of the power

socket inside the vehicle.

2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distribute the sealant in the tire.

3. Screw the connection hose of the com- pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

4. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

5. With standby state or drive-ready state switched on, switch on the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealer's service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla- tion pressure is reached.

6. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

7. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.

2. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Adjustment 1. Stop at a suitable location.

2. Screw the connection hose of the com- pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

Seite 237

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

3. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar.

Increase tire inflation pressure: with standby state or drive-ready state, switch on the compressor.

Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor.

5. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

6. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 150.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 145.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains

General information The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter- mined certain wheels and tires to be suita- ble for operation on the vehicle. Mounting

of snow chains on these wheels and tires is not permitted.

Safety information

Warning

With the mounting of snow chains on un- suitable tires, the snow chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not mount snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General information When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed immediately when there is a loss of tire in- flation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short- term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi- cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. When the vehicle is raised with the vehi- cle jack, do not lie under the vehicle and do not switch on the drive-ready state.

Seite 238

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under the vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve- hicle jack to bear weight. They have the potential to exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac- turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

Warning

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex- ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

Warning

When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this pur- pose, the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the ve- hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi- cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal- ers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General information The vehicle manufacturer recommends to additionally secure the vehicle against roll- ing away when changing a wheel.

Seite 239

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diago- nal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suit- able objects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction.

Preparing the vehicle Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip

ground at a safe distance from traffic.

Switch on the hazard warning system.

Set the parking brake.

Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P.

As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appropriate distance.

Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.

Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions.

Seite 240

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar- row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan- gular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand.

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle be- neath the jacking point.

6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly be- neath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.

7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the

Seite 241

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

ground and the relevant wheel is maxi- mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheel Mount one emergency wheel only, as re- quired.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.

3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.

If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.

4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross- wise pattern.

5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter- clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle.

6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se- curely.

After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The

tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.

2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, if necessary.

The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size.

3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.

4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.

6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the nearest dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 242

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Jump-starting, positive terminal

4 Jump-starting, negative terminal

5 Coolant reservoir

Seite 243

Engine compartment MOBILITY

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage vehicle compo- nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Have work in the engine com- partment performed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding parts, for instance locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor- rectly close the hood.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of in- jury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening the hood 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked.

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2.

Hood can be opened.

Seite 244

MOBILITY Engine compartment

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Indicator/warning lights When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Seite 245

Engine compartment MOBILITY

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Coolant

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi- tives of different colors. Observe the water - additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable additives is available from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the drive system hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the drive system cooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful and incorrect addi- tives can damage the drive system. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only.

NOTICE

Loss of coolant may damage the drive sys- tem. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that there is sufficient coolant in the reservoir at all times. Always have coolant added by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or re- pair shop.

Coolant level

Checking There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.

1. Allow the drive system to cool down.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 244.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any

Seite 246

MOBILITY Coolant

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be- tween the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

6. Close the lid.

When the coolant level is low, check the cooling system and add coolant. Have the cooling system checked and coolant added by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environ- mental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant ad-

ditives.

Seite 247

Coolant MOBILITY

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system provides service notifications and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the opera- tional reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

Improperly performed work, in particular maintenance and repair on the high-volt- age system, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that the work on the vehicle, in par- ticular maintenance and repair, be per- formed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

Concept Sensors and special algorithms take into ac- count the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to calculate the need for maintenance.

The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

General information Information on service notifications, refer to page 126, can be displayed on the Control Display.

Service data in the vehicle key Information on the service notifications is continuously stored in the vehicle key. The service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi- cle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve- hicle key with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.

Seite 248

MOBILITY Maintenance

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop up- date the time-dependent maintenance pro- cedures, such as checking brake fluid and changing the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Please consult your Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on the perform- ance of service and maintenance work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that maintenance and repair be per- formed by a service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diag- nosis

General information Devices connected to the OBD socket trig- ger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Remove any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in- tricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicles primary emissions sys- tem. Improper use of the socket for On- board Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehi- cle malfunctions and creates risks of per- sonal and property damage. Given the fore- going, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another quali- fied service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle's emissions.

Seite 249

Maintenance MOBILITY

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle tool kit

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the right side under the cargo floor panel or in a bag on the right side of the cargo area.

After use, secure the bag with the onboard vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the

wiper arms.

2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

Seite 250

MOBILITY Replacing components

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.

5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder of the wiper arm, arrow 2.

6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re- verse order.

7. Fold down the wiper arm.

Replacing the rear wiper blade 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.

3. Push the wiper blade out of the fasten- ing by continuing to turn it all the way.

4. Insert the new wiper blade by following the steps in reverse order. The wiper blade must engage audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contri- bution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- mends that you have appropriate work per- formed by a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not been described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 251.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are re- lated to conventional lasers and are offi- cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 251.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

Warning

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con- tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

Seite 251

Replacing components MOBILITY

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Warning

Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in- jury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Warning

Intensive brightness can irritate or dam- age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the head- lights or other light sources. Do not re- move the LED covers.

Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.

If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked.

Headlight setting The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight adjustment was changed, have it

checked and, if necessary, corrected by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

LED front lights, bulb replacement All lights feature LED technology.

In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal- er's service center or another qualified serv- ice center or repair shop.

LED front fog lights These front fog lights are made using LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

1 Side tail lights

2 Rear fog lights

3 License plate light

4 Center brake light

Seite 252

MOBILITY Replacing components

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Side tail lights

1 Tail lights

2 Turn signals/brake lights

3 Turn signals/brake lights

4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 251.

Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove left or right cover.

3. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing light, arrow, counterclockwise and re- move it.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the open- ing.

5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Central brake light and license plate lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 251.

The lights feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 251.

Seite 253

Replacing components MOBILITY

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

5-watt bulb, WY5W.

1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn signal lights are on the left and right next to the hinges of the hood.

2. Loosen the nuts of the cover by hand or with the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 250, and remove the cover.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

4. Replace the bulb.

5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in re- verse order of removal.

Vehicle battery

The vehicle battery has 12 volts. The bat- tery supplies the onboard electronics with energy.

For information about the high-voltage sys- tem, refer to page 218.

General information The battery is maintenance-free.

More information about the battery can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac- cident and damage to property. Only vehi- cle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your ve- hicle. Information on compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealers serv- ice center.

Register the battery to the vehicle The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- mends that you have a service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the battery has been registered again, all comfort features will be available without restriction and any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear.

Seite 254

MOBILITY Replacing components

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Charging the battery

General information For charging a discharged battery, refer to page 226.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

Power failure After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example:

Memory function: store the positions again.

Time: update.

Date: update.

Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the filled battery in an upright po- sition for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses The fuses are located in the glove compart- ment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is available on the Internet: www.mini.com/fusecard.

Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a sepa- rate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.

Seite 255

Replacing components MOBILITY

255 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis- play.

The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tail- gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General information Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.

Seite 256

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

General information In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man- ufacturer.

There are various ways of making contact.

Via a Check Control message, refer to page 121.

Calling with a mobile phone.

Requirements Active MINI Connected contract or

equipment version with intelligent emergency call.

Cellular network reception.

Standby state is switched on.

Starting If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, support is offered through Teleservice Diag- nosis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistance of the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice Diagnosis Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically.

Teleservice Help Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by re- questing it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Control Display is switched on.

4. Confirm Teleservice Help.

The driving ability of the vehicle can be re- stored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures will be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis- tance will be informed.

Emergency Request

Intelligent emergency call

Concept In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re- quest can be triggered automatically by the system or manually.

General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

The Intelligent Assist system establishes a connection with the MINI Response Center.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Re- quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora- ble conditions.

Seite 257

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

257 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Overview

SOS button in the roofliner

Functional requirements Standby state is switched on.

The Assist system is functional.

If the vehicle is equipped with intelli- gent emergency call: the SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been acti- vated.

Automatic triggering Under certain conditions, for instance if the airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Auto- matic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering 1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green.

The LED is illuminated green when an Emergency Request has been initiated.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehi- cle until the voice connection has been established.

The LED flashes green when a connec- tion to the MINI Response Center has been established.

The MINI Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum- stances.

For this purpose, data that serves to de- termine the necessary rescue measures, for instance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined, is transmitted to the MINI Response Cen- ter.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Re- sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the hands-free system, for instance, may be broken. However, the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the Emer- gency Request.

Jump-starting

General information Have only a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop perform the jump start.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of inju- ries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Seite 258

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

258 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Towing

Transporting the vehicle

General information The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehi- cle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, push it for a short distance at a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 103.

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Towing other vehicles

General information Switch on the hazard warning system, de- pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win- dow.

Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehi- cle's response. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve- hicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in- correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mount- ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol- low the following:

Seite 259

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

259 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners.

The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope Observe the following notes when using the tow rope:

Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en- able the vehicle to be towed without jerking.

Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening.

Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.

Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km.

When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 250, are together in the cargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.

Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.

Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Check the fastening of the tow fitting in regular intervals.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo- cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

Seite 260

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

What to do after an accident

Safety information

Warning

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of inju- ries or danger to life. After an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components such as orange colored high-voltage cables or parts that are in contact with exposed high-voltage cables.

Warning

Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor- rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch fluids escaping from the high-volt- age battery.

General information After an accident, comply with the follow- ing safety precautions with regard to the high-voltage system:

Secure the crash site.

Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or firefighters of the fact that your vehi- cle is equipped with a high-voltage sys- tem.

Engage selector lever position P, set the parking brake, and switch off the standby state and drive-ready state.

Lock the vehicle after exiting.

Do not inhale any gases escaping from the high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a safe distance from the vehi- cle.

Seite 261

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

261 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Washing the vehicle

General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. High voltage is present at the charging connection. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that work on the charging connec- tion, for instance cleaning, be performed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

When washing, water can get into the open charging socket. There is a risk of damage to property. Close the charging socket flap while washing.

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure wash- ers, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pres- sure washer.

Distances and temperature Maximum temperature: 140 /60 .

Minimum distance from sensors, cam- eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm.

Minimum distance from the charging socket flap: 31.5 in/80 cm.

Seite 262

MOBILITY Care

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Water can penetrate in the windshield area due to high-pressure washers. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not drive into high-pressure car wash systems.

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic washing sys- tems or car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the following instruc- tions:

Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in or- der to avoid paint damage.

Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the chassis.

Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.

Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam- age to the exterior mirrors.

Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod antenna breaking off.

Deactivate the wiper and, if neces- sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper system.

Driving into a car wash In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 101.

Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever po-

sition N. A signal is sounded when an at- tempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a car wash Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.

For activating drive-ready state, refer to page 101.

Headlights Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in- stance from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac- tion can be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the win- dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General information MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care products are available from a dealers serv- ice center or another qualified service cen- ter or repair shop.

Seite 263

Care MOBILITY

263 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Safety information

Warning

Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instructions on the container.

Vehicle paint

General information Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influen- ces in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve- hicle care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed immedi- ately to prevent the finish from being al- tered or discolored.

Matte finish Only use cleaning and care products suita- ble for vehicles with matte finish.

Leather care Remove dust from the leather regularly, us- ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in- creased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is substan- tially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General information Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro- fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams us- ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of damage to property. En- sure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 /60 . Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry them. The heat generated during brak-

Seite 264

MOBILITY Care

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

ing dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the ra- diator grille or door handles with plenty of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic- ularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub- ber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili- con-containing vehicle care products in or- der to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com- ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts

Warning

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol- ution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to re- tract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob- jects in the vehicle such that they are se- cured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re- moved, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's interior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Seite 265

Care MOBILITY

265 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Displays/Screens/Projection lenses

NOTICE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of dis- plays and screens. There is a risk of dam- age to property. Clean with a clean, anti- static microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro- fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re- fer to page 132.

Long idle times and long-term vehicle storage

Concept For idle phases that last several weeks, park the vehicle with the high-voltage battery fully charged, if possible.

Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days if the electric range is exhausted.

With storage times of up to three months, if possible plug the vehicle into a compatible power source or park it with the high-volt- age battery as fully charged as possible.

General information Your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can advise you on what to consider when stor- ing the vehicle for longer than three months.

Safety information

NOTICE

The high-voltage battery can be damaged if left uncharged or with low charge for ex- tended periods. There is a risk of damage to property. Before storing the vehicle for an extended period, ensure that the high- voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle period, connect the vehicle to a charg- ing station at a compatible charging loca- tion. If necessary, the high-voltage battery will be charged automatically. Make sure that charging is carried out. Regularly check the charge state.

Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for lon- ger than four weeks with a charge state below approx. 80 %.

Seite 266

MOBILITY Care

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Seite 267

Care MOBILITY

267 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The technical data and specifications in the Owner's Manual are used as guidance val- ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for instance due to the selected special equipment, country version or coun- try-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval docu- ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob- tained from a dealers service center or an- other qualified service center or repair shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-spe- cific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into ac- count attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for instance due to the selected special equipment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI Cooper SE

Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9/1,928

Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727

Height in/mm 56.4/1,432

Length in/mm 151.4/3,845

Wheelbase in/mm 98.2/2,495

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.1/10.7

Seite 268

REFERENCE Technical data

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Weights

MINI Cooper SE

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,913/1,775

Load lbs/kg 728/330

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,172/985

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,918/870

Seite 269

Technical data REFERENCE

269 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the edito- rial deadline

The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

Notes: notes: own safety: maintenance.

Driving tips: observe when driving: driv- ing on a race track.

Mobility: engine oil: topping up the en- gine oil.

Mobility: preventive maintenance: MINI maintenance system.

Mobility: preventive maintenance: Con- dition Based Service CBS.

Mobility: preventive maintenance: Main- tenance Manual and Service and War- ranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Seite 270

REFERENCE Appendix

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Seite 271

Appendix REFERENCE

271 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS Antilock Braking System 162 Accelerator pedal positions 105 Accessories and parts 8 Accident, what to do 261 Acoustic Pedestrian Protection 106 AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charg-

ing cable 220 Activated-charcoal filter 184 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 152 Active Voice Recognition 44 Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa-

tion Display (CID) 40 Adjustments, steering wheel 94 Advance climate control, see Stationary cli-

mate control 184 Airbags 141 Airbags, indicator and warning light 143 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air

mode 183 Air conditioning, climate 182 Air distribution, manual 183 Air drying, see Air conditioning 182 Air flow, automatic climate control 183 Air pressure, tires 227 Air vents, see Ventilation 184 Alarm system 79 Alarm triggering 79 Alarm, unintentional 80 All-season tires, see Winter tires 233 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 46 Antifreeze, washer fluid 117 Antilock Braking System ABS 162 Anti-slip control, see DSC 162 Approach control warning with city light

braking function 153 Approved axle load 269 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Arrival time 130 Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic Pedes-

trian Protection 106 Ash tray 192 Assistance when driving off 165 Assistance with breakdown 256 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6 AUTO intensity 183 Automatic climate control 181 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-

ror 93 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-

ger airbags 143 Automatic deactivation of the high-voltage

system 65 Automatic headlight control 136 Automatic locking 78 Automatic unlocking 78 Automatic vehicle wash 263 AUTO program, automatic climate con-

trol 182 AUTO program, intensity 183 Auto washing 262 Average consumption 129 Average speed 129 Axle loads, weights 269

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 86 Backrest, seats 85 Band-aids, see First-aid kit 256 Battery, charge state indicator 120 Battery, disposing of 255 Battery, vehicle 254 Being towed, see Towing 259 Belts, safety belts 87 Beverage holder, cup holder 200 Bluetooth connection 53

Seite 272

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Bottle holder, see Cup holder 200 Brake assistant 162 Brake discs, break-in 208 Brake pads, break-in 208 Braking, information 209 Breakdown assistance 256 Breakdown, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 150 Breaking in 208 Break recommendation, see Fatigue

alert 159 Brightness of Control Display 50 Bulb replacement 251 Bulb replacement, front 252 Bulb replacement, rear 252 Bulb replacement, side 253 Bulbs and lights 251 Button, SOS 257 Button, Start/Stop 100 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 258

C

California Proposition 65 Warning 9 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel-

ligent Safety 152 Camera lenses, care 266 Camera, rearview camera 173 Can holder, see Cup holder 200 Care, displays 266 Care, light-alloy wheels 264 Care, vehicle 263 Care, washing the vehicle 262 Cargo area 201 Cargo area, adapting size 205 Cargo area, enlarging 203 Cargo area lid 74 Cargo area, loading 201 Cargo area, storage compartments 203 Cargo cover 202 Cargo position, rear seat backrest 203 Cargo, stowing and securing 201 Cargo straps 202 Carpet, care 265 CBS Condition Based Service 248 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Center armrest 199 Center console 34 Central Information Display (CID) 36 Central Information Display (CID), see Con-

trol Display 38 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 131 Central locking system, unlocking, from in-

side 71 Central screen, see Control Display 38 Changes, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 8 Changing parts 250 Changing wheels 238 Changing, wheels and tires 231 Charge state indicator of the high-voltage

battery 120 Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 218 Charging cable, storing, see Storage 221 Charging screen 119 Charging, see Charging the vehicle 218 Charging, see Vehicle charging 218 Charging status, see Display of the charging

status 223 Charging the vehicle 218 Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charg-

ing 218 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wire-

less charging tray 194 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification

number 13 Check Control 121 Children, seating position 95 Children, transporting safely 95 Child restraint system 95 Child restraint system LATCH 98 Child restraint systems, mounting 96 Child seat, mounting 96 Child seats 95 Chrome parts, care 265 Cigarette lighter 192 Cleaning, displays 266 Clearance, water 209 Climate control 181 Clothes hooks 200 Coasting 106 Combination switch, see Turn signals 109

Seite 273

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

273 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Combi switch, see Wiper system 109, 113 Comfort Access 72 Comfort entry 67 Compartments in the doors 199 Compass 190 Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-

ces 53 Compressor 234 Computer, see Onboard Computer 129 Condensation on windows 184 Condensation under the vehicle 210 Condition Based Service CBS 248 Configuring driving program 165 Confirmation signal 79 Connecting device 52 Connecting electrical devices, see Sock-

ets 193 Connections 52 Consumption, see Average consump-

tion 129 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Contact with water, high-voltage system 65 Continued driving with a flat tire 148, 151 Control Display 38 Controller 38 Control systems, driving stability 162 Convenient closing 68 Convenient opening 67 Coolant 246 Cooling, maximum 182 Cooling system 246 Cornering light 137 Corrosion on brake discs 210 Cosmetic mirror 192 Coupling, see Pairing 52 Courtesy lights during unlocking 67 Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 68 Cruise control 167 Cruise control without distance control, see

Cruise control 167 Cup holder 200 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

D

Damage, tires 231 Dashboard 192 Data memory 10 Data protection, settings 51 Data, technical 268 Date 49 Date, display 125 Daytime pedestrian collision mitiga-

tion 157 Daytime running lights 137 DCC, see Cruise control 167 Decorative trim 192 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 184 Deleting personal data 51 Deletion of personal data 51 Departure times, stationary climate con-

trol 185 Destination distance 130 Device list 52 Digital clock 125 Digital compass 190 Dimensions 268 Dimmable exterior mirrors 92 Dimmable interior mirror 93 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 109 Display, date 125 Display, electronic, instrument cluster 119 Display for performance and energy recov-

ery 120 Display, GREEN Mode 214 Display, iDrive 36 Display lighting, see Instrument light-

ing 139 Displays 118 Displays, care 266 Displays, eDRIVE system 120 Displays, high-voltage system 120 Disposal, coolant 247 Disposal, vehicle battery 255 Distance control, see PDC 169 Distance to destination 130 Divided screen view, split screen 37 Drive display 120 Drive-off assistant 165

Seite 274

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Drive-off assistant, see DSC 162 Driver assistance, see Intelligent

Safety 152 Drive-ready state in detail 101 Drive-ready state, switching off 104 Drive-ready state, switching on 101 Driver Fatigue Detector 159 Driver profiles 75 Driver profiles, exporting profiles 77 Driver profiles, importing profiles 77 Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-

ing Modes switch 164 Driving in detail 104 Driving instructions, breaking in 208 Driving instructions, eDRIVE drive sys-

tem 213 Driving mode, GREEN 214 Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analy-

sis 216 Driving modes 164 Driving notes, general 208 Driving notes, things to remember when

driving 208 Driving on racetracks 211 Driving, see Drive-ready state in detail 101 Driving stability control systems 162 Driving, Start/Stop button 100 Driving style analysis 216 Driving through water 209 Driving tip, GREEN tip 215 Driving tips 208 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 162 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 163 DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 162 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 163

E

eDRIVE drive system, driving instruc- tions 213

eDRIVE, electric driving, see MINI eDRIVE 62

eDrive system, at a glance 0 eDRIVE system, displays 120

Electric driving 104 Electric driving, see MINI eDRIVE 62 Electric range 125 Electronic displays, instrument cluster 119 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see

DSC 162 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Emergency Request 257 Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As-

sistance 256 Emergency unlocking, transmission

lock 104 Energy recovery, button 106 Energy recovery, displaying 120 Energy recovery, driving stability control

systems 162 Engine compartment 243 Engine compartment, working in 244 Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic Pedes-

trian Protection 106 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- munication 6

Entering an address, navigation, see Own- er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Entering a vehicle wash 263 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Nav-

igation, Entertainment and Communica- tion 6

Equipment, interior 187 Error displays, see Check Control 121 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see

DSC 162 Exchanging, wheels and tires 231 Exiting a vehicle wash 263 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni-

tor 93 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 92 Exterior mirrors 92 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 92 External temperature display 125 External temperature warning 125 Eyes for securing cargo 202

Seite 275

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

275 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

F

Failure message, see Check Control 121 False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 80 Fan, see Air flow 183 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 87 Fatigue alert 159 Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil-

ter 184 Fine wood, care 265 First-aid kit 256 Fish, MINIMALISM display 216 Flat tire, changing wheels 238 Flat Tire Monitor TPM 150 Flat tire, repairing 234 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 145 Flat tire, warning light 146, 150 Flooding, driving through 209 Floor carpet, care 265 Floor mats, care 265 Fold-away position, windshield wip-

ers 112, 116 Foot brake 209 For Your Own Safety 8 Front airbags 141 Front fog lights 138 Front fog lights, LED, bulb replace-

ment 252 Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-

activation 143 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator

light 144 Front seats 85 Fuse 255

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer- sal Remote Control 187

General driving notes 208 General settings 48 Glare shield 192 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 84 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-

roof 82

Glove compartment 198 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 49 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

GREEN+ - program, driving dynamics 165 GREEN Mode 214 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 164 GREEN tip, driving tip 215 Gross vehicle weight, approved 269 Ground clearance 211

H

Handbrake, see Parking brake 107 Hand-held transmitter, alternating

code 188 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- cation 6

Hazard warning flashers 256 Head airbag 142 Headlight control, automatic 136 Headlight flasher 109 Headlight glass 252 Headlights, care 263 Head restraints and seats 85 Head restraints, front 89 Head restraints, rear 90 Head-up Display 132 Head-up Display, standard view 132 Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 201 High-beam Assistant 137 High beams 109 High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-

sistant 137 High-voltage battery, charge state indica-

tor 120 High-voltage battery, discharge 214 High-voltage battery, heated 106 High-voltage battery, heavily dis-

charged 106 High-voltage system, automatic deactiva-

tion 65 High-voltage system, contact with water 65 High-voltage system, displays 120

Seite 276

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

High-voltage system, safety 65 High-voltage system, work 65 Hills 210 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-

tant 165 Holder for beverages 200 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote

Control 187 Homepage, see Internet 6 Hood 244 Horn 32 HUD Head-up Display 132 Hydroplaning 209

I

Ice warning, see External temperature warning 125

Icy roads, see External temperature warn- ing 125

Identification marks, tires 228 Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-

cation number 13 Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-

ter 131 Increasing the range 212 Indication of a flat tire 146, 150 Indicator and warning lights, see Check

Control 121 Indicator light, see Check Control 121 Individual air distribution 183 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 75 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see

Wireless charging tray 194 Inflation pressure, tires 227 Inflation pressure warning, tires 150 Information 6 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 146 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 150 Input, iDrive 36 Instrument cluster 118 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 119 Instrument lighting 139 Integrated key 70 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-

cle 60

Integrated Universal Remote Control 187 Intelligent emergency call 257 Intelligent Safety 152 Intended use 8 Intensity, AUTO program 183 Interior equipment 187 Interior lights 139 Interior lights during unlocking 67 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 68 Interior mirror 92 Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 93 Interior mirror, compass 190 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 93 Interior motion sensor 80 Internet site 6 Interval display, service notifications 126 Interval mode 110, 114 In the vicinity of the center console 34 In the vicinity of the roofliner 35 In the vicinity of the steering wheel 32 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the

vehicle 60

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 240 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 84 Jam protection system, windows 81 Jump-starting 258

K

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 72 Key, see Integrated key 70 Key, see Vehicle key 66 Knee airbag 142

L

Label on recommended tires 232 Label, runflat tires 233 Language, set on Control Display 48 Lashing eyes 202 LATCH child restraint fixing system 98

Seite 277

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

277 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Leather care 264 LED ring, central instrument cluster 131 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 251 Letters and numbers, entering 36 Level 1 charging 224 Level 1 charging cable 220 Level 2 charging cable 220 Light 135 Light-alloy wheels, care 264 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 251 Lighter 192 Lighting 135 Light replacement 251 Light replacement, front 252 Light replacement, rear 252 Light replacement, side 253 Lights and bulbs 251 Light switch 135 List of all messages 50 Load 202 Loading 201 Loading position 203 Location, vehicle position 49 Locking, automatic 78 Locking, from inside 71 Locking, see Opening and Closing 66 Locking, settings 78 Longer idle phases 266 Long idle times, long-term vehicle stor-

age 266 Long-term vehicle storage 266 Low beams 135 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-

sistant 137 Lower back support, mechanical 86 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage

rack 211 Lumbar support, mechanical 86

M

Maintenance 248 Maintenance requirements 248 Maintenance, service notifications 126 Maintenance system, MINI 248 Make-up mirror 192

Malfunction displays, see Check Con- trol 121

Manual brake, see Parking brake 107 Manual control, air distribution 183 Manual control, air flow 183 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 170 Manual operation, rearview camera 173 Manufacturer of the MINI 8 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Matt paint, care 264 Maximum cooling 182 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit

Info 127 Maximum speed, winter tires 233 Measuring units 49 Mechanical key 70 Media of the Owner's Manual 60 Medical kit 256 Menu in instrument cluster 128 Menus, Central Information Display

(CID) 40 Messages 50 Messages, see Check Control 121 Microfilter 184 MID - program, driving dynamics 164 MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

MINI driving modes 164 MINI eDRIVE 0 MINI Electric Corona Spoke 2 Tone 231 MINI logo projection during unlocking 67 MINI maintenance system 248 MINIMALISM analyzer 216 MINIMALISM information 216 Minimum tread, tires 230 MINI Roadside Assistance 256 Mirrors 92 Mobile communication devices in the vehi-

cle 209 Mobile phone, connecting 52 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communica- tion 6

Seite 278

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

278 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis- tance 256

Mobility System 234 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 8 Moisture in headlight 252 Monitor, see Control Display 38 Mounting of child restraint systems 96 MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

N

Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints front 89

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints rear 90

Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy rims 264 New wheels and tires 231

O

OBD Onboard Diagnosis 249 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 174 Odometer 124 Onboard Computer 129 Onboard Diagnosis OBD 249 Onboard literature, printed 60 Onboard vehicle tool kit 250 On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 256 Opening and Closing 66 Opening, from inside 71 Operating concept Central Information Dis-

play (CID) operating concept 36 Operating menus, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 36 Operation via the Controller 40 Operation via touchscreen 41 Optional equipment 7

Owner's Manual, printed 60

P

Paint, car care 264 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 80 Panic mode 80 Panoramic glass sunroof 82 Parallel parking assistant 175 Park Distance Control PDC 169 Parked vehicle, condensation 210 Parked vehicle ventilation, see Stationary

climate control 184 Parking aid, see PDC 169 Parking assistant 175 Parking brake 107 Parking lights 135 Parts and accessories 8 Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 93 Pathway lighting 136 Pathway lines, rearview camera 174 PDC Park Distance Control 169 Pedestrian Protection, acoustic 106 Performance Control 164 Performance display 120 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 75 Phone, connecting 52 Plastic, care 265 PostCrash - iBrake 160 Power failure 255 Power windows 81 Pressure, tires 227 Pressure warning, tires 150 Printed onboard literature 60 Profiles, see Driver profiles 75 Programmable memory buttons, Central In-

formation Display (CID) 42 Protective function, glass sunroof 84 Protective function, windows 81 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 38

Seite 279

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

279 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Q

Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging cable 220

R

Racetrack operation 211 Radiator fluid 246 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6 Rain sensor 110, 114 Range 125 Ratchet straps 202 Rear lights 252 Rear seat backrests, folding down 203 Rearview camera 172 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 92 Rear window defroster 184 Rear window wiper, operation 112, 115 Recirculated-air filter 184 Recirculated-air mode 183 Recommended tire brands 232 Recuperation, button 106 Remaining range 125 Remote control, universal 187 Remote services, app, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- munication 6

Replacing parts 250 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 69 Replacing, wheels and tires 231 Reporting safety malfunctions 13 RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 167 Reserve warning, see Range 125 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 146 Retreaded tires 232 Roadside parking lights 136 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 188 Roofliner 35 Roof-mounted luggage rack 211 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- cation 6

RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat tires 233

RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Rubber components, care 265 Runflat tires 233

S

Safe braking 209 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and

front passenger seat 89 Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 89 Safety belts 87 Safety belts, care 265 Safety of the high-voltage system 65 Safety systems, airbags 141 Screens, care 266 Screen, see Control Display 38 Screwdriver 250 Sealant, see Mobility System 234 Search for charging stations, see Owner's

Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Seat heating, front 87 Seating position for children 95 Seats and head restraints 85 Seats, front 85 Securing cargo 201 Selection list in instrument cluster 128 Sensors, care 266 Service and warranty 9 Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 256 Service notifications, display 126 Service requirements, Condition Based

Service CBS 248 Servotronic 165 SET button, Cruise Control 167 Settings, general 48 Settings, locking/unlocking 78 Settings, mirrors 92 Settings, seats and head restraints 85 Side airbag 141 Signaling, horn 32 Signals when unlocking 79

Seite 280

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Sitting safely 85 Sizes, see Dimensions 268 Slide/tilt glass roof 82 Smartphone, connecting 52 Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communica- tion 6

Snow chains 238 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 249 Sockets, electrical devices 193 Software update 58 SOS button 257 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

Speed, average 129 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit

Info 127 Speed Limit Info 127 Speed warning 130 Split screen 37 SPORT program, driving dynamics 165 Stability control systems 162 Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charg-

ing cable 220 Standard charging, see Level 1 charg-

ing 224 Standard equipment 7 Standard view, Head-up Display 132 Standby state 100 Stars, MINIMALISM display 216 Start/Stop button 100 Stationary climate control 184 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- cation 6

Status control display, tires 145 Status information, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 37 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Status, vehicle 134 Steering assistance 165 Steering column adjustment 94 Steering wheel, adjusting 94 Stop function in stationary vehicle 108 Storage, charging cable 221

Storage compartments 198 Storage, tires 233 Storing the vehicle 266 Stowing and securing cargo 201 Suitable devices 53 Suitable mobile phones 53 Summer tires, tread 230 Sun visor 192 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 60 Supplementary text message 124 Switch for driving dynamics 164 Switching off, drive-ready state 104 Switching on, drive-ready state 101 Switch, see Cockpit 32 Symbols 6

T

Tailgate 74 Tailgate via vehicle key 68 Tail lights 252 Technical changes, see For Your Own

Safety 8 Technical data 268 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

Temperature, automatic climate con- trol 181

Temperature display for external tempera- ture 125

Text message, see Check Control mes- sages 124

Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 79 Thigh support 86 Tilt alarm sensor 80 Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 93 Time 48 Time of arrival 130 Tire damage 231 Tire identification marks 228 Tire inflation pressure 227

Seite 281

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

281 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see TPM 150

Tire pressure 227 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 145 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 234 Tires 227 Tires, changing 231 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 234 Tires, runflat 233 Tire tread 230 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6 Tools 250 Total vehicle weight 269 Touchscreen 41 Towing 259 TPM Flat Tire Monitor 150 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 145 Traction control 163 TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control,

DTC 163 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- tion 6

Transmission lock, electronic unlock- ing 104

Transporting children safely 95 Tread, tires 230 Trip computer 130 Triple turn signal activation 109 Trip odometer 124 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 124 Trunk, see Cargo area 201 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 174 Turn signal, front 252 Turn signal, indicator light 123 Turn signal, side 253 Turn signals, operation 109 Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 252

U

Unintentional alarm 80 Units, see Measuring units 49 Universal remote control 187 Unlocking, automatic 78

Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 66 Unlocking, settings 78 Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 Update, software 58 Updating software 58 Upholstery care 264 USB connection 55 USB port, position in vehicle 194 Used battery, disposing of 255 Use, intended 8 Using a smartphone via voice activation 46

V

Vanity mirror 192 Vehicle battery 254 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-

tance 256 Vehicle, breaking in 208 Vehicle care 263 Vehicle care products 263 Vehicle features and options 7 Vehicle identification number 13 Vehicle jack 240 Vehicle key, additional 69 Vehicle key, loss 69 Vehicle key, malfunction 69 Vehicle key, opening/closing 66 Vehicle key, replacing the battery 69 Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 66 Vehicle paint, care 264 Vehicle position, vehicle location 49 Vehicle status 134 Vehicle wash 263 Vehicle wash, automatic 263 Vehicle, washing 262 Ventilation 184 Venting, see Stationary climate control 184 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13 Voice activation 44 Voice command response 44 Voice recognition, see Active Voice Recog-

nition 44

Seite 282

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

282 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

W

Warning and indicator lights, see Check Control 121

Warning displays, see Check Control 121 Warning messages, see Check Control 121 Warning triangle 256 Warranty 8 Washer fluid 117 Washer nozzles, windshield 112, 115 Washing the vehicle 262 Water, high-voltage system 65 Water on roads 209 Weights 269 Welcome lights 136 Welcome lights during unlocking 67 Wheel base, vehicle 268 Wheels 227 Wheels, changing 231 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 145 Windows, powered 81 Windshield cleaning system 109, 113 Windshield washer fluid 117 Windshield washer nozzles 112, 115 Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-

tion 112, 116 Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-

tem 109, 113 Winter storage, care 266 Winter tires, suitable tires 233 Winter tires, tread 230 Wiper blades, replacing 250 Wiper fluid 117 Wiper system 109, 113 Wireless charging of a smartphone, see

Wireless charging tray 194 Wireless charging tray for smart-

phones 194 Wood, care 265 Word match concept, navigation 36 Work, high-voltage system 65 Wrench 250

Seite 283

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

283 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

01405A02680 ue

*BL5A0268000Z*

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California:

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Cooper SE Mini works, you can view and download the Mini Cooper SE Mini Electric 2020 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Mini Cooper SE as well as other Mini manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mini Cooper SE. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mini Cooper SE Mini Electric 2020 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mini Cooper SE Mini Electric 2020 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mini Cooper SE Mini Electric 2020 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mini Cooper SE Mini Electric 2020 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mini Cooper SE Mini Electric 2020 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.